2007 Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7 Instrument Panel ....................................... 199

Front Seats .............................................. 9 Instrument Panel Overview ................... 202
Rear Seats ............................................. 19 Climate Controls ................................... 227
Safety Belts ............................................ 38 Warning Lights, Gages, and
Child Restraints ...................................... 61 Indicators .......................................... 242
Airbag System ........................................ 90 Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 260
Restraint System Check ....................... 108 Audio System(s) ................................... 290
Features and Controls .............................. 111 Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 355
Keys ..................................................... 113 Your Driving, the Road, and
Doors and Locks .................................. 122 Your Vehicle ..................................... 356
Windows ............................................... 132 Towing ................................................. 417
Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 135 Service and Appearance Care .................. 441
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 139 Service ................................................. 444
Mirrors .................................................. 162 Fuel ...................................................... 446
OnStar® System ................................... 173 Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 456
Universal Home Remote System .......... 177 Rear Axle ............................................. 496
Storage Areas ...................................... 190 Four-Wheel Drive .................................. 497
Sunroof ................................................ 197 Front Axle ............................................ 498

1
 Headlamp Aiming ................................. 499 Maintenance Schedule .............................. 575
Bulb Replacement ................................ 502 Maintenance Schedule .......................... 576
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement ..................................... 505 Customer Assistance Information ............. 597
Tires ..................................................... 507 Customer Assistance and Information ..... 598
Appearance Care .................................. 553 Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 615
Vehicle Identification ............................. 562 Index .......................................................... 619
Electrical System .................................. 563
Capacities and Specifications ................ 572

2
 This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, if you ever need it while you are on the road. If
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the you sell the vehicle, leave this manual with
names TAHOE, SUBURBAN, and Z71 are the vehicle.
registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation. Canadian Owners
This manual includes the latest information at the
A French language copy of this manual can be
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
obtained from your dealer/retailer or from:
make changes in the product after that time
without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, Helm, Incorporated
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada P.O. Box 07130
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it Detroit, MI 48207
appears in this manual.

Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15854794 C Third Printing 2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from {CAUTION:
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn These mean there is something that could
about the features and controls for the vehicle. hurt you or other people.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
Index reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
A good place to quickly locate information about you do not, you or others could be hurt.
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual You will also find a
and the page number where it can be found. circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
Safety Warnings and Symbols means “Do Not,” “Do
There are a number of safety cautions in this Not do this” or “Do Not
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to let this happen.”
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.

4
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices: The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
Notice: These mean there is something with the text describing the operation or
that could damage your vehicle. information relating to a specific component,
A notice tells about something that can damage control, message, gage, or indicator.
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could component, gage, or indicator, reference the
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help following topics:
avoid the damage.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors • Features and Controls in Section 2
or in different words. • Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They • Climate Controls in Section 3
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. • Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 51
Manual Seats ................................................ 9 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 52
Power Seats ............................................... 10 Right Front Passenger Position ................... 52
Power Lumbar ............................................. 11 Center Front Passenger Position ................. 53
Heated Seats .............................................. 12 Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 54
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 13 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 56
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 15 Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 60
Head Restraints .......................................... 18 Safety Belt Extender ................................... 60
Center Seat ................................................ 19 Child Restraints ............................................ 61
Rear Seats .................................................... 19 Older Children ............................................. 61
Heated Seats .............................................. 19 Infants and Young Children ......................... 64
60/40 Split Bench Seat Child Restraint Systems .............................. 68
(Second Row) .......................................... 20 Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 72
Bucket Seats (Second Row) ........................ 26 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Third Row Seat ........................................... 33 (LATCH) .................................................. 74
Safety Belts .................................................. 38 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 38 Seat Position ........................................... 82
Questions and Answers About Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Safety Belts ............................................. 42 Front Seat Position .................................. 85
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 43 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Driver Position ............................................. 43 Front Seat Position .................................. 85

7
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System .............................................. 90 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 106
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 93 Adding Equipment to Your
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 96 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 107
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 98 Restraint System Check ............................. 108
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 99 Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 108
What Will You See After an Airbag Replacing Restraint System Parts After
Inflates? ................................................... 99 a Crash ................................................. 109
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 101

8
Front Seats To move a manual seat
forward or rearward:

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving. 2. Slide the seat to where you want it and
release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.

9
Power Seats On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used
to operate them are located on the outboard
side of the seats. To adjust the seat, do any of the
following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire control up or down.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
control is located behind the power seat control on
the outboard side of the seats. See “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining Seatbacks
on page 15.
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for
more information.

10
Power Lumbar • To raise the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which
allows seat settings to be saved and recalled.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13
for more information.
Keep in mind that as your seating position
changes, as it may during long trips, so should the
position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat
as needed.
If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used
to operate this feature are located on the
outboard side of the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold
the front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold
the rear of the control.

11
Heated Seats J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this
button to turn on the heated seat and seatback.
On vehicles with heated
The light on the button will come on to indicate that
front seats, the controls
the feature is working. Press the button to cycle
are located on the
through the temperature settings of high, medium,
driver’s and passenger’s
and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.
doors, near the door
Indicator lights above the button will show the level
handle.
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds
after the ignition is turned off. If you want to
use the heated seat feature after you restart your
vehicle, you will need to press the appropriate
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn heated seat or seatback button again.
on the heated seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate
that the feature is working. Press the button
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heat to the
seatback off. Indicator lights below the button show
the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.

12
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and
recall their positions.
Your vehicle may have the memory package. Not all adjustable throttles and brake pedals
The controls for this will have the ability to save and recall
feature are located on their positions.
the driver’s door 2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are
panel, and are used to heard indicating that the position has been
program and recall stored.
memory settings for the A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake
driver’s seat, outside pedal position can be programmed by repeating
mirrors, and the the above steps and pressing button 2.
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal. To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be
in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or
button 2 corresponding to the desired driving
position. The seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
To save your positions in memory, do the throttle and brake pedals will move to the position
following: previously stored. You will hear a single beep.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable feature is on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror,
position. and adjustable pedal movements will occur.
See Outside Power Mirrors on page 170 and See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280
page 143 for more information. for more information.

13
To stop recall movement of the memory function Easy Exit Seat
at any time, press one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, power mirror buttons, or The control for this feature is located on the
adjustable pedal switch. driver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit
the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position can be recalled by pressing the exit
position, the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable button. You will hear a single beep, and the
pedals recall may stop working. If this happens, driver’s seat will move back.
remove the obstruction and press the appropriate If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the
control for the area that is not responding for Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic
two seconds. Try recalling the memory position seat movement will occur when the key is removed
again by pressing the appropriate memory button. from the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under
If the memory position is still not recalling, see DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
your dealer for service. on page 280 for more information.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also
be programmed using the DIC.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280.

14
Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, the
lever used to operate them is located on the
Manual Reclining Seatbacks outboard side of the seat(s).

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

{CAUTION: 1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
If the seatback is not locked, it could then release the lever to lock the seatback
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. in place.
That could cause injury to the person
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
sitting there. Always push and pull on the is locked.
seatback to be sure it is locked.

15
To return the seatback to an upright position, do Power Reclining Seatbacks
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the

control used to recline them is located on the
outboard side of the seat behind the power seat
control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of
the control forward.

16
 {CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

moving.

17
Head Restraints Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
release button (A),
located on the top of
the seatback, while
you push the head
restraint down.

The front seats may have head restraints that also

tilt forward and rearward.
To tilt the head restraint, grasp the top of the
restraint while pressing the button (B), located on
the inboard side of the head restraint, and
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the move it forward or rearward until the desired
restraint is at the same height as the top of locking position is reached. Try to move the head
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the restraint after the button is released to make
chance of a neck injury in a crash. sure that it is locked in place.
The second row seats may have head rests that
can be adjusted up and down, but they do not tilt.

18
Center Seat Rear Seats
Your vehicle may have a front center seat.
The seatback doubles as an armrest and Heated Seats
cupholder/storage area for the driver and
passenger when the center seat is not used. Do If the rear seats have
not use it as a seating position when the seatback the heated seat feature,
is folded down. the buttons used to
For information on safety belts for this position, control this feature are
see Center Front Passenger Position on page 53. located on the Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) panel.

Driver’s Side RSA

Heated Seat Button
Only shown

M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion,

press the button with the heated seat symbol.
A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA
display to indicate that the feature is on. Press the
button to cycle through the temperature settings
of high, medium, and low, and to turn it off.

19
Indicator bars next to the symbol will designate Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
the level of heat selected: three for high, two Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
for medium, and one for low.
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front
after the ignition is turned off. If the vehicle of, or on the seat.
is restarted, the heated seat button will need to be
pressed again to restart the feature. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
60/40 Split Bench Seat the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their normal stowed
(Second Row) position before folding a rear seat.
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s)
can be folded for additional cargo space or
folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the
third row seats, if your vehicle has them. These
seats will have either the manual fold and tumble
feature or the automatic seat release fold and
tumble feature.

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of

the seat, to release the seatback.
20
 3. Lift the same lever
again to release the
rear of the seat
from the floor. The
seat will tumble
forward.

The seatback will fold forward automatically.

Leaving the seatback in this position creates a
flat load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the
front seat forward and/or put the front
seatback in the upright position.

21
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position {CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the
following: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. properly attached, or twisted will not
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is provide the protection needed in a crash.
not latched to the floor. The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the
{CAUTION: safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. 3. Make sure the safety belt in the center
That could cause injury to the person seating position is not caught between the two
sitting there. Always push and pull on the seats and is not twisted.
seatback to be sure it is locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push

and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.

22
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats

{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while
the second row is folded, or folded and
tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat
to the passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rear of
the second row seat(s) on the inboard side, to
To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if release the seatback. The seatback will fold
your vehicle has them, do the following: forward.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front 3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear
of, or on the seat. of the seat from the floor. The seat will
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety tumble forward automatically.
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.

23
Automatic Release Fold and Tumble 2. From the front
Feature seats, press one of
the automatic
The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this seat release buttons
feature to work. located on the
overhead console.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

{CAUTION:
Overhead Console
Automatically folding and tumbling the Buttons shown, Panel
seat when someone is sitting in the seat, Button similar
could cause injury to the person sitting
there. Always make sure there is no one When accessing the third row seats, if your
sitting in the seat before pressing the vehicle has them, from the outside of the
vehicle, press the button on the panel behind
automatic seat release button.
either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds the
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front There will be a slight delay between the folding
of, or on the seat. of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their normal stowed
position before folding a rear seat.
24
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position {CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the
following: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. properly attached, or twisted will not
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is provide the protection needed in a crash.
not latched to the floor. The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the
{CAUTION: safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. 3. Make sure that the safety belt in the center
That could cause injury to the person seating position is not caught between the
sitting there. Always push and pull on the two seats and is not twisted.
seatback to be sure it is locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward.

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.

25
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row 2. Press the automatic
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or seat release button
Outside located on the
panel behind the
rear doors.
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while
the second row is folded, or folded and
tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden
Driver’s Side Rear Panel
stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat Button shown
to the passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure it is One press of the button automatically folds the
locked into place. seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding
of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row
seats, if your vehicle has them, do the following: Bucket Seats (Second Row)
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks
of, or on the seat. can be reclined, the seats can be folded for
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety additional cargo space, or folded and tumbled for
belts still fastened may cause damage to the easy entry and exit to the third row seats, if
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle your vehicle has them. These seats will have either
the safety belts and return them to their normal the manual fold and tumble feature or the
stowed position before folding a rear seat. automatic seat release fold and tumble feature.

26
Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
the seat. is locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.

27
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front
of, or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their normal stowed
position before folding a rear seat.

The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the

seatback in this position creates a flat
load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the
front seat forward and/or put the front
seatback in the upright position.

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of

the seat, to release the seatback.
28
 3. Lift the lever again
to release the rear
of the seat from {CAUTION:
the floor. The seat
will tumble forward. If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push

and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting locked.
Position
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the
following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is
not latched to the floor.

29
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the 2. Lift the lever,
Third Row Seats located on the
bottom rear of the
second row seat on
{CAUTION: the inboard side,
to release the
seatback. The
Using the third row seating position while
seatback will fold
the second row is folded, or folded and forward.
tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat
to the passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place. 3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the
seat from the floor. The seat will tumble
forward.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row
seats, if your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front
of, or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.

30
Automatic Release Fold and Tumble 2. From the front
Feature seats, press one of
the automatic
The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this seat release buttons
feature to work. located on the
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) overhead console.

{CAUTION:
Automatically folding and tumbling the Overhead Console
seat when someone is sitting in the seat, Buttons shown
could cause injury to the person sitting When accessing the third row seats, if your
there. Always make sure there is no one vehicle has them, from the outside of the
sitting in the seat before pressing the vehicle, press the button on the panel behind
automatic seat release button. either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds the
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
of, or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their normal stowed
position before folding a rear seat.

31
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Position Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the Outside
following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. {CAUTION:
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is
not latched to the floor. Using the third row seating position while
the second row is folded, or folded and
tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden
{CAUTION: stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat
to the passenger seating position. Push
If the seatback is not locked, it could and pull on the seat to make sure it is
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. locked into place.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked. To fold and tumble the seat from the third row
seats, if your vehicle has them, do the following:
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front
and pull on the seatback to make sure it is of, or on the seat.
locked. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.

32
 2. Press the automatic Folding the Seatback(s)
seat release button
located on the To fold the seatback, do the following:
panel behind the 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
rear doors. the seat.
2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
Driver’s Side Rear Panel
the safety belts and return them to their normal
Button shown stowed position before folding a rear seat.
3. Lift the release lever,
One press of the button automatically folds the located on the bottom
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. rear of the seatback
There will be a slight delay between the folding on the outboard
of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat. side of the seat, and
the seatback will
Third Row Seat fold forward.
If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s)
can be folded and the entire seat can be
tumbled, or removed from the vehicle.

33
Unfolding the Seatback(s) To tumble the seat, do the following:
To return the seatback to the upright position, do 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
the following: the seat.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for 2. Make sure the head rests are completely
the seat. lowered, there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat, and all items are removed from
2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the the cupholder and storage bin, if the seat is
upright position. a two-passenger seat.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the
{CAUTION: instructions previously listed under “Folding
the Seatbacks”. You will not be able to unlatch
the seat from the floor unless the seatback
If the seatback is not locked, it could is folded down.
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
4. Unlatch the seat
That could cause injury to the person from the floor by
sitting there. Always push and pull on the lifting the lever
seatback to be sure it is locked. located next to the
carrying handle
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it on the rear of the
is locked. seat near the
bottom.
Tumbling the Third Row Seat
The seat can be tumbled forward for additional
cargo space.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.

34
 6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it {CAUTION:
is locked.
Put the seat in this position only when necessary If the seatback is not locked, it could
for additional cargo space. move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
Returning the Third Row Seat from a That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
Tumbled Position
seatback to be sure it is locked.
To return the seat to the normal seating position,
do the following:
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for is locked.
the seat.
2. Make sure there is nothing that could become Removing the Third Row Seat
trapped under the seat. To remove the seat, do the following:
3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for
lifting the lever located next to the carrying the seat.
handle at the bottom rear of the seat.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the
4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. instructions listed under “Folding the
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is Seatbacks” previously. The seat cannot be
not latched to the floor. removed unless the seatback is folded.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the
upright position.

35
 3. Unlatch the seat 3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down on
from the floor by the seat to engage the rear floor latches.
pulling the carrying
handle, located
at the rear of {CAUTION:
the seat, rearward.
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a
track in the floor to guide the seat wheels
out of the vehicle. 4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place. The seatback cannot be
Installing the Third Row Seat raised to the upright position unless the seat is
secured to the floor.
To install the seat, do the following:
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the
upright position.
vehicle.
2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the
track on the floor and roll the seat forward.
The front latches should lock into place. If the
latches do not lock, try tilting the rear of
the seat upward slightly.

36
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. properly attached, or twisted will not
That could cause injury to the person provide the protection needed in a crash.
sitting there. Always push and pull on the The person wearing the belt could be
seatback to be sure it is locked. seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it safety belts are properly routed and
is locked. attached, and are not twisted.

7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the

original position over the seatbacks.

37
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
This part of the manual tells you how to use
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
{CAUTION: area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
Do not let anyone ride where he or she everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you using a safety belt properly.
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
worse. You can hit things inside the your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 244 and
seriously injured or killed. In the same Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on
crash, you might not be, if you are page 245.
buckled up. Always fasten your safety In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
belt, and check that your passengers’ law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
belts are fastened properly too. They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.

38
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be Why Safety Belts Work
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
between. In many of them, people who buckle up as it goes.
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a

seat on wheels.

39
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.

40
The person keeps going until stopped by or the instrument panel...
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...

41
 Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an

accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I

have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle they work with safety belts — not instead of
does. You get more time to stop. You stop them. Every airbag system ever offered
over more distance, and your strongest bones for sale has required the use of safety belts.
take the forces. That is why safety belts Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
make such good sense. you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.

42
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
far from home, why should I wear
safety belts? This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are about safety belts and children. And there
in an accident — even one that is not your are different rules for smaller children and babies.
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Being a good driver does not protect you Older Children on page 61 or Infants and Young
from things beyond your control, such as bad Children on page 64. Follow those rules for
drivers. everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) First, you will want to know which restraint
of home. And the greatest number of systems your vehicle has.
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of
We will start with the driver position.
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone. Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

43
 Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 51.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is 6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
secure. If the belt is not long enough, shoulder belt.
see Safety Belt Extender on page 60. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
44
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.

45
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give

nearly as much protection this way.

46
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

as much protection this way.

47
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

48
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It

should be worn over the shoulder at all
times.

49
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

50
 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down,
squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. height adjuster
The belt should go back out of the way. and move the height
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out adjuster to the desired
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can position.
damage both the belt and your vehicle.

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on

the shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try
to move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
51
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
to be seriously injured if they do not wear the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
safety belts. them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 43.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature which may turn off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, just
let the belt go back all the way and start again.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder

belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.

52
Center Front Passenger Position
Lap Belt
Your vehicle may have a center front seating
position.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as

shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as
the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not
long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on
page 60.
When you sit in the center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. Make sure the release button on the buckle is
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
pull it along the belt. safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

53
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.

54
 When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 60.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and

snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
shoulder part. belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.

55
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash.

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.

56
There is one guide for each outside passenger
position in the second row seat and the third row,
if your vehicle has one. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:

Third Row
If your vehicle has a third row, remove the
guide from its storage pocket on the side
of the seat.
Second Row
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.

57
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
place the guide over the belt, and insert the and the guide on top.
two edges of the belt into the slots of the
guide.

58
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt

as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 54. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Slide the guide into
its storage clip on the interior body or storage
pocket on the side of the seat.

59
Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
driver and right front passenger. Although you you should use it.
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for wear, so the extender will be long enough for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if your you. To help avoid personal injury, do not
vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags, safety let someone else use it, and use it only for the
belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
belts in a side crash or a rollover event. designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety
crash, you will need to get new ones, and belt. For more information, see the instruction
probably other new parts for your safety belt sheet that comes with the extender.
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 109.

60
Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
Older Children A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The
shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It
should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
Older children who have outgrown booster seats thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. to use safety belts properly.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat

that has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

61
 Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside
position, move the child toward the center
of the vehicle. If the child is sitting in the
second row center position, move the child
toward the safety belt buckle. In either
case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on
the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint
that belts provide. See Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 56. If the child is so
{CAUTION: small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a rear seat that has
Never do this.
a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.

62
 {CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

63
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This {CAUTION:
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the Children can be seriously injured or
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state around their neck and the safety belt
in the United States and in every Canadian continues to tighten. Never leave children
province says children up to some age must be unattended in a vehicle and never allow
restrained while in a vehicle.
children to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride in

vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.

64
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.

65
 {CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.

66
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints? {CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic Newborn infants need complete support,
types. Selection of a particular restraint should including support for the head and neck.
take into consideration not only the child’s This is necessary because a newborn
weight, height, and age but also whether or not infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
the restraint will be compatible with the motor so much compared with the rest of its
vehicle in which it will be used. body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
For most basic types of child restraints, there seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
are many different models available. When forces can be distributed across the
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is strongest part of an infant’s body, the
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, back and shoulders. Infants always
the restraint will have a label saying that it should be secured in appropriate infant
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of
restraints available for children with special
needs.

67
 Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in appropriate child restraints. in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

68
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
the seating surface against the back of the for the child’s body with the harness and also
infant. The harness system holds the infant in sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant or shelf-like shields.
positioned in the restraint.

69
 Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt sure the child restraint is designed to be
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
positioner, and some high-back booster seats saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also safety standards. Then follow the instructions
help a child to see out the window. for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.

70
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the Vehicle the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
{CAUTION: available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
A child can be seriously injured or killed
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
in a crash if the child restraint is not move around in a collision or sudden stop and
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
the child restraint is properly installed in secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt when no child is in it.
or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child

restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 74 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.

71
Securing the Child Within the Child Because there are different systems, it is important
Restraint to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if the
There are several systems for securing the child child is not properly secured in the child restraint.
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down Where to Put the Restraint
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle Accident statistics show that children are safer if
together at the crotch. The five-point harness they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and seat. We recommend that child restraints be
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has a booster seat.
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
that swings up or to the side. a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing
{CAUTION: child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

A child can be seriously injured or killed

in a crash if the child is not properly
{CAUTION:
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
the child is properly secured, following the
can be seriously injured or killed if the
instructions that came with that restraint.
right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
CAUTION: (Continued)

72
CAUTION: (Continued) {CAUTION:
This is because the back of the
A child in a child restraint in the center
rear-facing child restraint would be
front seat can be badly injured or killed by
very close to the inflating airbag.
the right front passenger’s airbag if it
Even though the passenger sensing inflates. Never secure a child restraint in
system is designed to turn off the the center front seat. It is always better to
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
under some unusual circumstance, even secure the child restraint properly.
though it is turned off. We recommend Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
that rear-facing child restraints be move around in a collision or sudden stop and
secured in the rear seat, even if the injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
airbag is off. secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
alwaysmove the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

73
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
Children (LATCH) tether anchors and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during Lower Anchors
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be attached
using only the top tether and anchor. Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
you need a child restraint that has LATCH LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will child restraint with lower attachments (B).
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.

74
Top Tether Anchor Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a
top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child

restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or
a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.

75
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor j (Lower Anchor):
Locations Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with i (Top Tether Anchor):
two lower anchors. Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Second Row — Bucket

Second Row — 60/40

i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.

Third Row — Two

Passenger

76
 i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.

Third Row — Three

Passenger

For models with a three passenger third row seat,

see the information following for installing a
child restraint with a top tether in the third row, if
your vehicle has one. Never install two top
tethers using the same top tether anchor. Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with 60/40 second row seating, the For models with bucket second row seating, the
rear right side passenger and center seating top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of
positions have exposed metal anchors located in the seat cushion for each seating position in the
the crease between the seatback and the seat second row. Be sure to use an anchor located
cushion. on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
For models with second row bucket seats, both
rear seating positions have exposed metal anchors
located in the crease between the seatback and
the seat cushion.

77
 Second Row Seat — 60/40 Third Row Seat — Two or Three Passenger
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat,
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of there is one top tether anchor located at the
the seat cushion for each seating position in bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used
the second row. Be sure to use an anchor located for the rear driver side seating position in the
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating third row. Never install two top tethers using the
position where the child restraint will be placed. same top tether anchor.
For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat,
there is one top tether anchor located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used
for either the third row center or driver side
seating position. Never install two top tethers using
the same top tether anchor.
78
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger position or the third row passenger side CAUTION: (Continued)
seating position if your vehicle has a third row
seat, if a national or local law requires that the top or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
tether be attached, or if the instructions that child restraint is properly installed using
come with the child restraint say that the top tether the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
must be attached. There is no place to attach
belts to secure the restraint, following the
the top tether in these positions.
instructions that came with that restraint,
Accident statistics show that children are safer if and also the instructions in this manual.
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 72
for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for {CAUTION:
the LATCH System
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
{CAUTION: child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not cause the anchor or attachment to come
attached to anchors, the restraint will not loose or even break during a crash. A
be able to protect the child correctly. In a child or others could be injured if this
crash, the child could be seriously injured happens. To help prevent injury to people
CAUTION: (Continued) and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.

79
 Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
{CAUTION: belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
Children can be seriously injured or belts to their normal, stowed position before
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped folding the rear seat.
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
safety belts behind the child restraint so
not have lower attachments or the desired
children cannot reach them. Pull the seating position does not have lower anchors,
shoulder belt all the way out of the secure the child restraint with the top tether
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle and the safety belts. Refer to your child
has one, after the child restraint has been restraint manufacturer instructions and the
installed. Be sure to follow the instructions in this manual.
instructions of the child restraint 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
manufacturer. seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s attachments on the child restraint to the
safety belt assembly may cause damage to lower anchors.
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.

80
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends If the position you are
that the top tether be attached, attach and using does not have a
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, head rest/restraint
if the vehicle has one. Refer to the child and you are using a
restraint instructions and the following steps: dual tether, route
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. the tether over the
seatback.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are If the position you are
using does not have a using has an adjustable
head rest/restraint head rest/restraint
and you are using a and you are using a
single tether, route the dual tether, route
tether over the the tether around the
seatback. head rest/restraint.

81
 If the position you are Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
using has an adjustable
head rest/restraint Seat Position
and you are using a If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
single tether, raise the Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
head rest/restraint (LATCH) on page 74.
and route the tether
under the head If your vehicle has a third row, there is no top
rest/restraint and in tether anchor in the passenger-side seating
between the head position. Do not secure a child restraint in this
rest/restraint posts. position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different tether must be anchored.
directions to be sure it is secure. If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.

82
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle out of the retractor to set the lock.
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

83
 6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, and the
position that you are using has a top tether
anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 74.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child back all the way. The safety belt will move
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and larger child passenger.
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.

84
Securing a Child Restraint in the Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A
rear seat is a safer place to secure a
{CAUTION: forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 72.
A child in a child restraint in the center
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
front seat can be badly injured or killed by system. The passenger sensing system is
the right front passenger’s airbag if it designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
inflates. Never secure a child restraint in frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant
the center front seat. It is always better to seat or a small child in a forward-facing child
secure a child restraint in the rear seat. restraint or booster seat is detected. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 101 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 246 for
Do not use child restraints in this position. The more information on this including important
restraints will not work properly. safety information.

85
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because CAUTION: (Continued)
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If you need to secure a forward-facing
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can child restraint in the right front seat,
be seriously injured or killed if the right always move the front passenger seat as
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is far back as it will go. It is better to secure
because the back of the rear-facing child the child restraint in a rear seat.
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. If you need to secure a forward-facing child
Even though the passenger sensing restraint in the right front seat position, move the
system is designed to turn off the right seat as far back as it will go before securing
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.
no system is fail-safe, and no one can If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
under some unusual circumstance, even (LATCH) on page 74.
though it is turned off.
CAUTION: (Continued)

86
There is no top tether anchor at the right front When the passenger sensing system has
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
position if a national or local law requires that airbag, the off indicator in the passenger
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
that come with the child restraint say that the top when you turn the ignition to RUN or
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors START. See Passenger Airbag Status
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 74 if Indicator on page 246.
the child restraint has a top tether. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
the instructions that came with the child restraint. through or around the restraint. The child
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as restraint instructions will show you how.
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 101. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats
on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.

87
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle out of the retractor to set the lock.
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

88
 8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit
and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN or
START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and adjust the head restraint.
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
If you are using a forward-facing child child restraint in a rear seat position in the
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your vehicle and check with your dealer.
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
to pull more of the belt from the retractor vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
once the lock has been set. The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different passenger.
directions to be sure it is secure.

89
Airbag System Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your
vehicle may also have roof-mounted rollover {CAUTION:
airbags designed for either side impact or rollover
deployment. Roof-mounted rollover airbags are You can be severely injured or killed
available for the driver and the passenger seated
in a crash if you are not wearing your
directly behind the driver and for the right front
passenger and the passenger seated directly safety belt — even if you have airbags.
behind that passenger. Wearing your safety belt during a crash
helps reduce your chance of hitting things
If your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags,
the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
covering on the ceiling above the sidewall trim near Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the driver’s and right front passenger’s window and the safety belts. All airbags are designed
the second row outside seating positions. to work with safety belts but do not
Also, if your vehicle has a third row passenger seat, replace them.
you may have third row roof-mounted rollover Frontal airbags for the driver and right
airbags. front passenger are designed to deploy in
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag. crashes.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do
their job and comply with federal regulations. CAUTION: (Continued)

90
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side Both frontal and roof-mounted rollover
crashes. And, for some unrestrained airbags inflate with great force, faster than
occupants, frontal airbags may provide the blink of an eye. If you are too close to
less protection in frontal crashes than an inflating airbag, as you would be if you
more forceful airbags have provided in were leaning forward, it could seriously
the past. injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
Roof-mounted rollover airbags are during a crash. Always wear your safety
designed to inflate in moderate to severe belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
crashes where something hits the side of should sit as far back as possible while
your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover, or still maintaining control of the vehicle.
in a severe frontal impact. They are not Occupants should not lean on or sleep
designed to inflate in rear crashes. If your against the door in the first or second row
vehicle has roof-mounted airbags, they seats, or the rear windows in the third row
are designed to provide both side impact seat, if your vehicle has roof-mounted
protection and rollover protection. rollover airbags.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.

91
 There is an airbag
readiness light on the
{CAUTION: instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
Anyone who is up against, or very close airbag symbol.
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best The system checks the airbag electrical system for
protection for adults, but not for young malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
safety belt system nor its airbag system is page 245 for more information.
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 61 or Infants and Young Children on
page 64.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door in the first or second row
seats, or the rear windows in the third row
seat, if your vehicle has roof-mounted
rollover airbags.

92
Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the

instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.

93
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag
for the driver and the person seated directly for the right front passenger and the person
behind the driver, it is located in the ceiling above directly behind that passenger, it is located in the
the side windows. ceiling above the side windows.

94
 {CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag other airbag covering. And, if your vehicle
and a third row passenger seat, the airbag is has roof-mounted rollover airbags, never
located in the ceiling above the rear windows for secure anything to the roof of your
the outside passenger positions in the third row. vehicle by routing the rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If
you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear.

95
When Should an Airbag Inflate? In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to frontal sensors, which help the sensing system
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a a more severe frontal impact. For moderate
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less
thresholds take into account a variety of desired than full deployment. For more severe frontal
deployment and non-deployment events and are impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the move or deform, the threshold level for the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle (14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h).
direction of the impact, and how quickly your The threshold level can vary, however, with
vehicle slows down. specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.

96
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which
speeds. For example: enables the sensing system to monitor the
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the fore and aft position of the driver’s seat. Seat
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed position sensors provide information that is used
than if the vehicle hits a moving object. to determine if the airbags should deploy at a
reduced level or at full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mounted
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that rollover airbags and a rollover sensor. See
does not deform. Airbag System on page 90. These “rollover
capable” airbags are intended to inflate in
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), moderate to severe side crashes, during a rollover,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash or in a severe frontal impact. A roof-mounted
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object rollover airbag will inflate if the crash severity is
(like a wall). above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
the airbags could inflate at a different crash design. Roof-mounted airbags are not intended to
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-mounted
the object. rollover airbags will deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck, during a rollover, or in a
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
severe frontal impact.
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

97
In any particular crash, no one can say whether What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is sensing system detects that the vehicle is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle in a crash. In the case of a roof-mounted rollover
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows airbag, the sensing system detects that the
down. For roof-mounted rollover airbags, vehicle is about to roll over or has been in a severe
inflation is determined by the location and severity frontal or side impact. The sensing system
of the impact or a rollover event. triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related
The airbag system is designed to work properly hardware are all part of the airbag modules
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially panel in front of the right front passenger.
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. For vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags,
See Off-Road Driving on page 372 for tips on the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of the
off-road driving. vehicle, near the side windows.
If your vehicle has a third row seat with
roof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbag modules
are located inside the rear-most pillar trim and
above in the ceiling above the fixed rear glass.

98
How Does an Airbag Restrain? What Will You See After an Airbag
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal Inflates?
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In quickly that some people may not even realize
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted an airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbags
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. may still be at least partially inflated minutes
Airbags supplement the protection provided after the vehicle comes to rest. Some components
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the of the airbag module — the steering wheel hub
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But right front passenger’s airbag, and the area
the frontal airbags would not help you in many along the ceiling of the vehicle near the side
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear windows for vehicles with roof–mounted side
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because impact airbags — may be hot for a short time. The
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. parts of the airbag that come into contact with
Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not help you you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There
in many types of collisions, including many may be some smoke and dust coming from the
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts. vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicles
with roof-mounted rollover airbags.

99
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and
the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from flash the hazard warning flashers when the airbags
leaving the vehicle. inflate. You can lock the doors again, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn off the hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for those features.
{CAUTION: In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
When an airbag inflates, there may be deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
dust in the air. This dust could cause also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
breathing problems for people with a • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
history of asthma or other breathing an airbag inflates, you will need some new
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the parts for your airbag system. If you do not get
vehicle should get out as soon as it is them, the airbag system will not be there to help
safe to do so. If you have breathing protect you in another crash. A new system will
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle include airbag modules and possibly other
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air parts. The service manual for your vehicle
by opening a window or a door. If you covers the need to replace other parts.
experience breathing problems following • Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
an airbag deployment, you should seek diagnostic module which records information
medical attention. after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 609.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work properly. See
your dealer for service.
100
Passenger Sensing System The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
The passenger airbag status indicator on the the passenger sensing system.
overhead console will be visible when you turn The passenger sensing system works with sensors
your ignition key to RUN or START. that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
United States Canada secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and forward-facing child seat, and an older child riding
off, will be visible during the system check. in a booster seat.
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 246.

101
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun CAUTION: (Continued)
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing We recommend that rear-facing child
child is so great, if the airbag deploys. restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION: If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can always move the front passenger seat as
be seriously injured or killed if the right far back as it will go. It is better to secure
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is the child restraint in a rear seat.
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
inflating airbag. off the right front passenger’s airbag if:
Even though the passenger sensing • The right front passenger seat is unoccupied
system is designed to turn off the • The system determines that an infant is
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system present in a rear-facing infant seat
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
• The system determines that a small child is
system is fail-safe, and no one can
present in a forward-facing child restraint
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even • The system determines that a small child is
though it is turned off. present in a booster seat
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
CAUTION: (Continued) of the seat for a period of time

102
 • The right front passenger seat is occupied by If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
a smaller person, such as a child who has child restraint in a rear seat position in the
outgrown child restraints vehicle and check with your dealer.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag The passenger sensing system is designed to
system or the passenger sensing system. enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
When the passenger sensing system has turned airbag anytime the system senses that a person of
off the passenger’s airbag, the off indicator will light adult size is sitting properly in the right front
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the that the airbag is active.
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint For some children who have outgrown child
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position sensing system may or may not turn off the right
on page 85. front passenger’s airbag, depending upon the
person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not there is an airbag for that person.
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.

103
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbag.

104
 Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
{CAUTION: operates. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment. See
If the airbag readiness light in the Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
instrument panel cluster ever comes on Vehicle on page 107 for more information about
and stays on, it means that something modifications that can affect how the system
may be wrong with the airbag system. If operates.
this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front {CAUTION:
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
Readiness Light on page 245 for more on seat or between the passenger’s seat
this, including important safety cushion and seatback may interfere with
information. the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.

105
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle {CAUTION:
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
several places around your vehicle. You do turned off and the battery is disconnected,
not want the system to inflate while someone is an airbag can still inflate during improper
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the service. You can be injured if you are
service manual have information about servicing close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a yellow connectors. They are probably part
service manual, see Service Publications of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
Ordering Information on page 616. proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular

maintenance.

106
Adding Equipment to Your Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
airbags from working properly? and diagnostic module, rollover sensor
module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
A: Yes. If you add things that change your overhead console, ceiling headliner, ceiling
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, and pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted rollover
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep airbag modules, or airbag wiring can affect the
the airbag system from working properly. operation of the airbag system. If you have
Also, the airbag system may not work properly questions, call Customer Assistance. The
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If phone numbers and addresses for Customer
you have any questions about this, you should Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
contact Customer Assistance before you Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
addresses for Customer Assistance are in page 598.
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 598.

107
Restraint System Check Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
or the side impact airbag covering on the
Checking the Restraint Systems ceiling near the side windows, the airbag may
not work properly. You may have to replace
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
the airbag module and the instrument panel
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
for the right front passenger’s airbag, or
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
side impact airbag module and ceiling covering
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
for roof-mounted rollover airbags (if equipped).
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Care of Safety Belts on page 556 for more
information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

108
Replacing Restraint System Parts If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have
After a Crash LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or
replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary
even if the belt or LATCH system was not being
{CAUTION: used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
A crash can damage the restraint systems system parts. See the part on the airbag system
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint earlier in this section.
system may not properly protect the If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
person using it, resulting in serious injury replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
or even death in a crash. To help make sure retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
your restraint systems are working retractor assembly will be there to help protect you
properly after a crash, have them inspected in a collision.
and any necessary replacements made as After a crash you may need to replace the driver
soon as possible. and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
LATCH system parts? belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
After a very minor collision, nothing may be checked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they your airbag readiness light stays on after you start
would be if worn during a more severe crash, then your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag
you need new parts. Readiness Light on page 245.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
109
✍ NOTES

110
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................ 113 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 139
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 114 New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 139
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Ignition Positions ....................................... 140
Operation ............................................... 115 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 141
Doors and Locks ........................................ 122 Starting the Engine .................................... 141
Door Locks ................................................ 122 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 143
Power Door Locks ..................................... 123 Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 143
Delayed Locking ........................................ 123 Active Fuel Management™ ........................ 145
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 123 Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 145
Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 124 Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 149
Lockout Protection ..................................... 124 Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 150
Liftgate/Liftglass ......................................... 125 Parking Brake ........................................... 156
Power Liftgate ........................................... 127 Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 157
Power Running Boards .............................. 131 Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 159
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 159
Windows ...................................................... 132 Engine Exhaust ......................................... 160
Power Windows ........................................ 133 Running the Engine While Parked ............. 161
Sun Visors ................................................ 134
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 135
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 135
PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 137
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 137

111
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Mirrors ......................................................... 162 Universal Home Remote System ................ 177
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror System Identification .................................. 177
with OnStar®, Compass and Universal Home Remote System ............... 178
Temperature Display .............................. 162 Universal Home Remote System
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Operation (With One Triangular LED) ....... 178
Compass and Temperature Display ......... 166 Universal Home Remote System
Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 168 Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 182
Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................... 169 Storage Areas ............................................. 190
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 170 Glove Box ................................................. 190
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 171 Cupholder(s) .............................................. 190
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............. 172 Center Console Storage Area .................... 190
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors .............. 172 Luggage Carrier ........................................ 191
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 173 Rear Storage Area .................................... 192
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 173 Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 192
OnStar® System .......................................... 173 Cargo Cover ............................................. 192
Cargo Management System ...................... 194
Sunroof ....................................................... 197

112
Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.

113
 Your vehicle has one Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
double-sided key for the
ignition, all door System
locks, and the spare tire Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
hoist lock, if your operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
vehicle has one. Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able
received, including interference that may
to assist you with obtaining replacements.
cause undesired operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. conditions:
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call 1. This device may not cause interference.
the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 604. 2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

114
At times you may notice a decrease in operating Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
range. This is normal for any RKE system. If
the transmitter does not work or if you have to System Operation
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked
work, try this: from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m)
• Check the distance. You may be too far from away with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer transmitter.
during rainy or snowy weather. If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects also start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter. The
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
to the left or right, hold the transmitter provides an increased operating range of 195 feet
higher, and try again. (60 m) away. However, the operating range may be
• Check to determine if battery replacement is less while the vehicle is running. As a result, you
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System than you were to start it.
Operation on page 115. There are other conditions which can affect the
• If you are still having trouble, see your performance of the transmitter. See Remote
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 114.
for service.

115
 Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. If enabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once to
indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through
the DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button is
pressed again within five seconds of the previous
press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280 for
additional information. Pressing the lock button
may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 135.

With Remote Start and With Remote Start and " (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
Liftglass (Without Power Liftgate and driver’s door. If the button is pressed again
Remote Start Similar) Liftglass (Without within five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
Remote Start Similar) The interior lamps will come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
The following functions may be available if your If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps will
vehicle has the RKE system: flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 280. Pressing the unlock button on the
this feature, it may be started from outside
RKE transmitter will disarm the content
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See
theft-deterrent system. See Content
“Remote Vehicle Start” following for more detailed
Theft-Deterrent on page 135.
information.

116
m (Liftglass): Press and hold this button on Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
the RKE transmitter to open the liftglass. Vehicle
& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this button Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
on the RKE transmitter to open and close the transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
liftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime will transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening and purchased through your GM dealer. Remember
closing. to bring any additional transmitters so they
can also be re-coded to match the new transmitter.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,
release this button to locate your vehicle. The turn the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound The vehicle can have a maximum of eight
three times. Press and hold this button for more transmitters matched to it. See “Relearn Remote
than two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation and
sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 267 for
turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to
the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition your vehicle.
must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

117
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the
RKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 270 for additional
information.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care the following:
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static 1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the
from your body transferred to these surfaces notch on the side of the transmitter and
may damage the transmitter. separate the bottom half from the top half.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a
metal object to do this.

118
 3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with During a remote start, if your vehicle has an
the positive side of the battery facing down. automatic climate control system and heated
Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type. seats, the heated seats will turn on during colder
Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water will outside temperatures and will shut off when
not get in. the key is turned to RUN. If your vehicle does not
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter have an automatic climate control system,
together. during remote start, you will need to manually turn
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
vehicle. on page 12 for additional information.

Remote Vehicle Start Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. require a person using the remote start to have the
This feature allows you to start the engine from vehicle in view when doing so. Check local
outside of the vehicle. It may also start up the regulations for any requirements on remote starting
vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems and of vehicles.
rear window defogger. Normal operation of the Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle
system will return after the key is turned to the RUN is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
position.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,
automatic climate control system, the climate provides an increased range of operation. However,
control system will default to a heating mode during the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
colder outside temperatures and a cooling mode As a result, you may need to be closer to your
during warmer outside temperatures. If your vehicle vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.
does not have an automatic climate control system, There are other conditions which can affect the
during remote start, the climate control system will performance of the transmitter, see Remote
turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 114 for
the vehicle was last turned off. additional information.
119
/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lock If the vehicle is left running it will automatically
button and then press and hold the remote shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
start button to start the vehicle. has been done.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
do the following: following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. • Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock parking lamps turn off.
button, then immediately press and hold
the transmitter’s remote start button until the • Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see • Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote
start button for at least four seconds. The The vehicle can be remote started two separate
vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote times between driving sequences. The engine will
start button again after the vehicle has run for 10 minutes after each remote start.
started will turn off the ignition. Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote
turn on and remain on while the vehicle is start time frame, and before the engine stops.
running. For example, if the lock button and then the remote
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has
has been driven, repeat these steps, while been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
the engine is still running, to extend the engine added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
running time by 10 minutes. Remote start The additional ten minutes are considered a
can be extended one time. second remote vehicle start.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start,
insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.

120
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start Remote Start Ready
with one time extension has been done, the
vehicle must be started with the key. If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start
After the key is removed from the ignition, the ready feature. This feature allows your dealer to
vehicle can be remote started again. add the manufacturer’s remote vehicle start
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is feature.
in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,
there is an emission control system malfunction. the RKE transmitter will have an extended
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote range that allows locking or unlocking of the
vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too vehicle from approximately 197 feet (60 m) away.
high or if the oil pressure gets low. See your dealer if you would like to add the
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle.
vehicle start system enabled. The system may be
enabled or disabled through the DIC. See
“REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280 for
additional information. If your vehicle does not
have DIC buttons, see your dealer to enable
or disable the remote vehicle start system.″

121
Doors and Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
Door Locks • Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A
child can be overcome by extreme
{CAUTION: heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Always lock your vehicle whenever
• Passengers, especially children, can you leave it.
easily open the doors and fall out of a • Outsiders can easily enter through an
moving vehicle. When a door is unlocked door when you slow down
locked, the handle will not open it. or stop your vehicle. Locking your
You increase the chance of being doors can help prevent this from
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if happening.
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the There are several ways to lock and unlock your
doors whenever you drive. vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued) From the outside, use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key in the
driver’s door.
From the inside, use the power door locks or
manual door locks. To lock or unlock the door with
the manual locks, push down or pull up on the
manual lock knob.

122
Power Door Locks This feature will not operate if the key is in the
ignition.
The power door lock switches are located on the
You can program this feature using the Driver
armrest on the front doors.
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR
K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization
unlock symbol to unlock the doors. (With DIC Buttons) on page 280.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with the Programmable Automatic Door
lock symbol to lock the doors.
Locks
Delayed Locking Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature
enable you to program the vehicle’s power
When locking the doors with the power lock switch door locks. You can program this feature through
or the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
lock five seconds after the last door is closed. You on page 280 for more information on DIC
will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed programming.
locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and immediately lock all
the doors.

123
Rear Door Security Locks When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless
prevent passengers from opening the rear
entry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
doors from the inside.
power door lock switch, or by lifting the
The rear door security rear door manual lock.
locks are located on the 2. Open the door from the outside.
inside edge of each
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
rear door. You
following:
must open the rear
doors to access them. 1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
The label showing 2. Insert the key into the security lock slot
lock and unlock and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.
positions is located near
the lock. Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in
Security Lock Label the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and
shown a front door is open.

To set the locks, do the following: If the driver’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the driver’s door is open and the
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and
turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position. then the driver’s door will unlock.
2. Close the door.

124
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the front passenger’s door is CAUTION: (Continued)
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors
will lock and then the front passenger’s door
will unlock. If you must drive with the liftglass or
liftgate open, or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must pass
Liftgate/Liftglass through the seal between the body and
the liftglass or liftgate:
{CAUTION: • Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
It can be dangerous to drive with the with the recirculation mode off. That
liftglass or liftgate open because carbon will force outside air into your vehicle.
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your See Climate Control System on
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It page 227 or Dual Automatic Climate
can cause unconsciousness and even Control System on page 231.
death. • If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
CAUTION: (Continued) the way.
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust on page 160.

If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power

Liftgate on page 127.

125
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock To open the entire liftgate, press the touchpad on
switch or press the door unlock button on the underside of the liftgate handle (B). The
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. vehicle must be in PARK (P) to open the liftgate.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System To close the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull
Operation on page 115. strap as an aid.
The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the
rear wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the
liftgate or liftglass while the rear wipers are in
motion will cause the release of the liftglass
or liftgate to delay until the wipers are moved off
the liftglass.
Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric
latch. If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftglass and liftgate will not open.
The liftglass and liftgate will resume operation
when the battery is reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected and has
adequate voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still
To open the liftglass, press the button on the will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a
underside of the license pocket applique (A). The dealership for service.
liftglass can also be opened by pressing the
liftglass release button on the RKE.

126
Power Liftgate To open and close the liftgate, press and hold the
power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless
Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. The Entry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate starts
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to power open or moving. Press the RKE button a second
close the liftgate. time during liftgate operation to reverse that
The liftgate must be completely closed to power operation. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
open or completely open to power close. System Operation on page 115 for more
information.
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound at
the beginning of each power operation cycle. The liftgate can also be
opened and closed by
pressing the power
{CAUTION: liftgate button on
the overhead console.
You or others could be injured if caught in Press the button a
the path of the power liftgate. Make sure second time during
there is no one in the way of the liftgate liftgate operation
to reverse that
as it is opening and closing.
operation.
Power Liftgate Button
Notice: If you open the liftgate without on Overhead Console
checking for overhead obstructions such as a
garage door, you could break the liftgate or The liftgate can be power opened by pressing the
the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure touchpad switch on the liftgate handle. Press
the area above the liftgate is clear before the button a second time during liftgate operation
opening it. to reverse that operation.

127
 If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while
the power function is in progress, the liftgate
power function will continue to completion. If you
shift the transmission out of PARK (P) and
accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed,
the liftgate may reverse to the open position.
Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always make
sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before
you drive away.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate
Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch support struts have lost pressure, the lights will
flash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will hold
The liftgate can be power closed by pressing the
open temporarily, then slowly close. See your
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.
dealer for service before using the liftgate.
Press the button a second time during liftgate
operation to reverse that operation.
The power liftgate my be temporarily disabled
under extreme high or low temperatures. If
this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated
manually. The power liftgate may not operate
under low battery conditions.

128
Obstacle Detection Features Manual Operation of Power Liftgate
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a
power open or close cycle, a warning chime will To change the liftgate to
sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse manual operation,
direction to the full closed or open position. toggle the switch on the
After removing the obstruction, the liftgate may be overhead console to
power opened or closed normally. If the liftgate the “Disable” position
encounters multiple obstacles on the same power indicated by a circle.
cycle, the power function will deactivate, and
the liftgate will switch to manual operation. The
REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate
that the liftgate is open. After removing the
obstructions, manually open the liftgate to the full With the power liftgate disabled and the door
open position or close the liftgate to the fully unlocked, the power liftgate can be manually
closed and latched position. The liftgate will now opened and closed.
resume normal power operation. To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the
Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the handle on the outside of the liftgate, and lift
side edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught the gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pull
between the liftgate and the body and presses cup or pull strap to lower the liftgate and close.
against this sensor, the liftgate will reverse The liftgate latch will power cinch to closed
direction and open fully. The liftgate will remain position. Always close the liftgate before driving.
open until it is activated again or closed manually. If the RKE button or the power close button on the
liftgate is pressed while power operation is
disabled, the lights will flash three times, but the
liftgate will not move.

129
It is not recommended that you drive with the
liftgate open, however, if you must drive with the CAUTION: (Continued)
liftgate open, the power liftgate should be switched
to manual liftgate operation — the overhead
console switch set to the “Disable” position. If you must drive with the liftglass or
liftgate open, or if electrical wiring or
Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch. other cable connections must pass
If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, through the seal between the body and
the liftglass and liftgate will not open. The
the liftglass or liftgate:
liftglass and liftgate will resume operation when
the battery is reconnected and charged. • Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
If the battery is properly connected and has cooling system to its highest speed
adequate voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still with the recirculation mode off. That
will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a will force outside air into your vehicle.
dealership for service. See Climate Control System on
page 227 or Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 231.
{CAUTION: • If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
It can be dangerous to drive with the the way.
liftglass or liftgate open because carbon • If your vehicle has a power liftgate,
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your disable the power liftgate function.
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can See Engine Exhaust on page 160.
cause unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION: (Continued)

130
Power Running Boards The switch used to
disable the power
Your vehicle may have power running boards. running boards is
The power running boards automatically extend located on the center
from beneath the vehicle on the side in which the console below the
door has been opened. Once the door is closed, climate control system.
the running boards will automatically move
back under the vehicle. The vehicle must not be
moving for the running boards to extend or retract.

The running boards cannot be disabled in the

extended position.

131
Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.

132
Power Windows
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: When there are children in the rear seat

use the window lockout button to prevent
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets unintentional operation of the windows.
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome from
extreme heat in warm or hot weather and The power window
suffer permanent injuries or even death controls are located on
from heat stroke. each of the side doors.

Leaving children in a vehicle with the

ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously
Driver’s Side shown
injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
CAUTION: (Continued)

133
The driver’s door also has switches that control Window Lockout
the passenger and rear windows. The power
windows work when the ignition has been turned o (Window Lockout): The window lockout
to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained switch is located with the power window switches
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained on the driver’s door armrest. This feature
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 141. prevents the rear passenger windows from
Press the switch to lower the window. operating, except from the driver’s position. Press
the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the An indicator light will come on to show the lockout
window. feature is on.
Express-Down Windows
Sun Visors
The driver and front passenger windows have an
express-down feature that allows the windows Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the
to be lowered without holding the switch. Press sun visor from the center mount and slide it
down fully on the window switch, then release, to along the rod from side-to-side to cover the driver
activate the express-down mode. The or passenger side of the front window. Swing
express-down mode can be canceled at any time the sun visor to the side to cover the side window.
by pulling up on the front edge of the switch. It can be moved along the rod from side-to-side
in this position also.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
on both the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors.
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to
turn the lamps on.

134
Theft-Deterrent Systems To activate the theft-deterrent system, do the
following:
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of 1. Open the door.
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry
put on it can make it impossible to steal. (RKE) transmitter. The security light should
come on and flash. The door does not need to
Content Theft-Deterrent be open.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent
alarm will not be activated until all doors are
alarm system.
closed and the security light goes off.
3. Close all doors. The security light will stop
flashing and go off after approximately
30 seconds. The content theft deterrent alarm
is not armed until the security light goes off.
If a door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The
horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key
is not placed in the ignition and turned to
START or the door is not unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go
off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the
horn will sound for about two minutes, then
will turn off to save the battery power.

135
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if you Testing the Alarm
lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock, or
the power door lock switch. It activates only if you The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
use the RKE transmitter. You should also 1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s
remember that you can start your vehicle with the window and open the driver’s door.
correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. 2. Activate the system by locking the doors with
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by the RKE transmitter.
accident: 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait
• If you do not want to activate the for the security light to go out.
theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be 4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
locked with the door key after the doors door with the manual door lock and open the
are closed. door. This should set off the alarm.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter. If the alarm does not sound when it should, but
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the the vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the
alarm if the system has been armed. horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers
alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter or on page 564.
by placing the key in the ignition and turning it If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s
to START. headlamps do not flash, see your dealer for
service.

136
PASS-Key® III+ PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a decoder in
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio your vehicle.
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Rules. Operation is subject to the following Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent
two conditions: system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not
1. This device may not cause harmful have to do anything special to arm or disarm the
interference. system. It works when you transition the key
2. This device must accept any interference to RUN, ACCESSORY or START from the OFF
received, including interference that may cause position.
undesired operation.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the
Canada. Operation is subject to the following vehicle from starting. Anyone using a
two conditions: trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
1. This device may not cause interference. discouraged because of the high number of
2. This device must accept any interference electrical key codes.
received, including interference that may cause If the engine does not start and the security light
undesired operation of the device. on the instrument panel cluster comes on
Changes or modifications to this system by other when trying to start the vehicle, the key may have
than an authorized service facility could void a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off
authorization to use this equipment. and try again.

137
If the engine still does not start, and the key To program the new additional key do the
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition following:
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 564. If the engine still does not start with the 2. Insert the original, already programmed, key
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your in the ignition and start the engine. If the
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See engine will not start, see your dealer
your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ for service.
to have a new key made. In an emergency, 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
contact Roadside Assistance. OFF, and remove the key.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to 4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn
learn the transponder value of a new or it to the RUN position within five seconds of
replacement key. Up to nine additional keys may removing the original key.
be programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys only. 5. The security light will turn off once the key
If all the currently programmed keys are lost or has been programmed.
do not operate, you must see your dealer or 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys
a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to are to be programmed.
have keys made and programmed to the system. If you are driving and the security light comes on
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service and stays on, you may be able to restart your
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut engine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
exactly as the ignition key that operates the may not be working properly and must be serviced
system. by your dealer.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

138
Starting and Operating Your • Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
Vehicle your new brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with new linings can
New Vehicle Break-In mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an guideline every time you get new brake
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in linings.
the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) Towing a Trailer on page 422 for the
or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, and more information.
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles Following break-in, engine speed and load can
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. be gradually increased.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.

139
Ignition Positions Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and
right while you turn the key hard. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in
the ACCESSORY ignition position and the RUN
position may drain the battery and prevent your
vehicle from starting. Do not operate your vehicle in
the ACCESSORY ignition position for a long period
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four of time.
different positions.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving. It is the
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and position the switch returns to after the engine starts,
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will and you release the key.
only be able to remove the key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK. The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.

140
Key In the Ignition Starting the Engine
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it To place the transmission in the proper gear:
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
chime will sound, when you open the driver’s door. NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
Always remember to remove your key from the any other position -- this is a safety feature. To
ignition and take it with you. This will lock your restart when you are already moving, use
ignition and transmission. Also, always remember NEUTRAL (N) only.
to lock the doors. Starting Procedure
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may the ignition key to START. When the engine
not be able to start your vehicle after it has been starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
parked for an extended period of time. down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Operate the engine and transmission gently to
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
(RAP) feature which will allow certain features on moving parts.
your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
after the ignition key is turned to LOCK. Cranking System. This feature assists
The radio, power windows, and if the vehicle has a in starting the engine and protects
sunroof and the OnStar® System, will work when components. If the ignition key is turned to the
the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. Once START position, and then released when
the key is turned from RUN to LOCK, the windows the engine begins cranking, the engine
and sunroof will continue to work until a door is will continue cranking for a few seconds or
opened. The radio will continue to work for up to until the vehicle starts.
10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
141
 If the engine does not start and the key is 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
held in START for many seconds, cranking will especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the way to the floor and holding it there as
the engine is already running. Engine you hold the key in START for up to a
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
switch to the ACCESSORY or LOCK 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
position. cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
of time, by returning the key to the START do the same thing. This clears the extra
position immediately after cranking has ended, gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
can overheat and damage the cranking engine immediately after starting it. Operate
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least the engine and transmission gently until the oil
15 seconds between each try, to allow warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
the cranking motor to cool down.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, your engine might not
perform properly. Any resulting damage would
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

142
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal No adjustment to the pedals can be made when
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while using
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the cruise control.
the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since allows pedal settings to be saved and recalled.
the pedals cannot move farther away from the See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13
standard position, but can move toward the driver for more information.
for better pedal reach.
Engine Coolant Heater
The switch used to
adjust the pedals is Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
located on the In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
instrument panel below the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
the climate control easier starting and better fuel economy during
system. engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to the engine coolant heater when the temperature
move the pedals closer to your body. Press is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
the arrow at the top of the switch to move the
pedals away from your body.

143
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
1. Turn off the engine. away from moving engine parts. If you do
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical not, it could be damaged.
cord. The cord is located on the driver’s How long should you keep the coolant heater
side of the engine compartment, near plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
the power steering fluid reservoir. temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded some other things. Instead of trying to list
110-volt AC outlet. everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
{CAUTION: advice for that particular area.

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded

outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

144
Active Fuel Management™ Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel There are several different positions for the
Management™. This system allows the engine to shift lever.
operate on either all or half of its cylinders,
depending on the driving conditions.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate
in the half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to
achieve better fuel economy. When greater
power demands are required, such as accelerating
from a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway,
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission with
the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.
an electronic shift position indicator within the
Your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™ instrument panel cluster. This display will show the
indicator. For more information on using this position anytime the shift lever is moved out of
display see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC PARK (P).
Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 267.

145
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily. {CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
{CAUTION: will be free to roll — even if your shift
lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) transfer case is in a drive gear, two-wheel
with the parking brake firmly set. Your high, four-wheel high or four-wheel
vehicle can roll. low — not in NEUTRAL. See Shifting Into
Park (P) on page 157.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
move suddenly. You or others could be
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
move, even when you are on fairly level transmission. The repairs would not be covered
ground, always set your parking brake by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See after your vehicle is stopped.
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 157. If you
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
snow, ice, or sand without damaging your
on page 422. transmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 404.

146
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
not connect with the wheels. To restart when provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. you need more power for passing, and you are:
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel • Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push
drive vehicle is being towed. your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push
{CAUTION: the accelerator all the way down.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer,
Shifting into a drive gear while your carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for
engine is running at high speed is off-road driving. You may want to shift the
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
drive gear while your engine is running at under Loss of Control on page 371
high speed. THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or You can use THIRD (3) on hills. It can help control
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high your speed as you go down steep mountain
speed may damage the transmission. The roads, but then you would also want to use your
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. brakes off and on.
Be sure the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting your vehicle.

147
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
even more than THIRD (3) without using your vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
brakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can accelerator pedal may damage the
help control your speed as you go down steep transmission. The repair will not be covered by
mountain roads, but then you would also want to your warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin
use your brakes off and on. the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
If you select SECOND (2) and the Tow/Haul has brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
not been selected, the transmission will drive When temperatures are very cold, the
in SECOND (2) gear. You may use this feature for Hydra-Matic® Automatic Transmission’s gear
reducing the speed of the rear wheels when shifting may be delayed providing more stable
you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts may
slippery road surfaces. be more noticeable with a cold transmission. This
If you select SECOND (2) and the Tow/Haul has difference in shifting is normal.
also been selected, the transmission operation will The transmission torque converter clutch operation
be limited to FIRST (1) and SECOND (2) gears. is restricted during cold operation. When the
You may use this feature for reducing the speed of startup transmission temperature is approximately
the rear wheels when you are trying to start 64°F (18°C) your torque converter clutch will
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. temporarily not operate. Once the transmission
temperature rises above 68°F (20°C), normal
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed operation will resume.
even more than SECOND (2) without using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the
transmission will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.

148
Tow/Haul Mode When Tow/Haul mode
is selected the Tow/Haul
indicator light will
come on.

The Tow/Haul mode works with the Autoride®

feature, if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride
when trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See
Autoride® on page 422.

Your vehicle has a Tow/Haul mode. The selector

button is located on the end of the column
shift lever. You can use this feature to assist when
towing or hauling a heavy load or if there is a
need to charge a battery installed in a trailer. See
Towing a Trailer on page 422 for more
information.

149
Four-Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send The transfer case knob
your engine’s driving power to all four wheels is located to the left of
for extra traction. Read the part that follows before the instrument panel
using four-wheel drive. cluster.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive
Low for an extended period of time may cause
premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive
Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during Your vehicle has Four Wheel Drive with
tight turns, you may experience a vibration in StabiliTrak®. For information on StabiliTrak®, see
the steering system. StabiliTrak® System on page 363.
Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel
Front Axle Locking Feature drive.
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for
the axle to lock or unlock is normal.

150
You can choose among five driving settings: AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting is ideal for use when road surface traction
setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on conditions are variable. When driving your
briefly when you turn on the ignition and the last vehicle in AUTO, the front axle is engaged, but
chosen setting will stay on. If the lights do not the vehicle’s power is primarily sent to the
come on, you should take your vehicle in for rear wheels. When the vehicle’s software
service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. determines a need for more traction, the system
Fast flashing means the conditions were not will transfer more power to the front wheels.
met to make the desired shift, typically the vehicle Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel
was going too fast, the automatic transmission economy than Two-Wheel Drive High.
was not in neutral, or the clutch pedal was not fully 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the
pressed. Slow flashing means the shift is in four-wheel high position when you need extra
progress. It will stay on when the shift is traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
completed. If for some reason the transfer case off-road situations. This setting also engages
cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the your front axle to help drive your vehicle. This is
last chosen setting. the best setting to use when plowing snow.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is
used for driving in most street and highway
situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best
fuel economy.

151
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This setting also NEUTRAL (N): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
engages your front axle and delivers extra NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
torque. You may never need this setting. It sends Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 418 or
maximum power to all four wheels. You might Towing Your Vehicle on page 417 for more
choose Four-Wheel Drive Low if you are driving information.
off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, and If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays
while climbing or descending steep hills. on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer
StabiliTrak® will not engage in this mode. See for service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
StabiliTrak® System on page 363 for more message” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
information. page 270.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or
{CAUTION: AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL position. This can be done at any speed,
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the except when shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.
transmission is in PARK (P). You or The indicator light will flash while shifting. It will
someone else could be seriously injured. remain on when the shift is completed.
Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.
See Parking Brake on page 156.

152
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position.
has stopped flashing could damage the
This can be done at any speed, except when
transfer case. To help avoid damaging your
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.
vehicle, always wait for the Four-Wheel
See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing
this section for more information. before shifting the transmission into gear.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low The vehicle may have significant engagement noise
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive
When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed Low and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from
should be kept below 45 mph. Extended NEUTRAL while the engine is running.
high-speed operation in 4L may damage or
shorten the life of the drivetrain. If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
position when your vehicle is in gear and/or
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the moving, the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light
ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the
be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to
Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph Four-Wheel Drive High mode.
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
Drive Low position. You must wait for the
Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before shifting your
transmission in gear.

153
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High switch position
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel
when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving,
Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, your
the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
Drive High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds
(5 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and
but will not complete the shift unless your
the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and
shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn
the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Shifting into NEUTRAL
Two-Wheel Drive High position. You must wait for
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the
the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel
following:
Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and
remain on before shifting your transmission 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
into gear. not roll.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear 2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
before the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light brake pedal. See Parking Brake on page 156
has stopped flashing could damage the for more information.
transfer case. To help avoid damaging your 3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
vehicle, always wait for the Four-Wheel
Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing 4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
before shifting the transmission into gear. 5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel
The vehicle may have significant engagement Drive High.
noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel Drive Low and Four-Wheel Drive High
ranges or from NEUTRAL while the engine is
running.
154
 6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to 3. Turn the transfer case dial to the desired
NEUTRAL till it stops and hold it for transfer case shift position (Two-Wheel
10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to Drive High, Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO).
the four low position. The NEUTRAL light will After the transfer case has shifted out of
come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out.
NEUTRAL is complete.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
7. If the engine is running, verify that the vehicle.
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting the
transmission to REVERSE (R) for one second, Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D) for before the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light
one second. has stopped flashing could damage the
transfer case. To help avoid damaging your
8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which will vehicle, always wait for the Four-Wheel
turn the engine off. Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P). before shifting the transmission into gear.
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving 5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to
the vehicle. the desired position.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of
the different modes may cause the transfer
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
case to enter the shift protection mode. This will
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following: protect the transfer case from possible damage
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular and will only allow the transfer case to respond to
brake pedal. one shift per 10 seconds. The transfer case
may stay in this mode for up to three minutes.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and
turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.

155
Parking Brake To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever,
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake located above the parking brake pedal, with the
pedal down with your right foot. Push down parking brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is
A chime will activate and the warning light will released, the brake system warning light will
flash when the parking brake is applied and go off.
the vehicle is moving at least 5 mph (8 km/h).
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 422.

156
Shifting Into Park (P) 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)
{CAUTION: position by pulling the shift lever toward
you and moving it up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous to get out of your 3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in gear — not in NEUTRAL (N).
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
engine running, the vehicle can move can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
suddenly. You or others could be injured. your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive,
if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your
vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift
lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 422.

157
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
Running running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and the parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you move the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
{CAUTION: Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle you can, it means that the shift lever was not
with the engine running. Your vehicle fully locked into PARK (P).
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
Torque Lock
brake firmly set. If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transmission into PARK (P) properly,
If you have four-wheel drive and your
the weight of the vehicle may put too much force
transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
will be free to roll, even if your shift lever may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out
is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent
case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
And, if you leave the vehicle with the into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
engine running, it could overheat and driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
Park (P) on page 157.
even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave your vehicle with the When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
engine running unless you have to. out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
brake.

158
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have Parking Over Things That Burn
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, then you will be able to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)

Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system which locks the shift lever
in PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK. You
have to fully apply your regular brakes before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is
in RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operation on
page 145.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the
way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Move the shift lever into another gear.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry
grass, or other things that can burn.

159
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: • Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
• Repairs were not done correctly.
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
cannot see or smell. It can cause
has been modified improperly.
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
You might have exhaust coming in if: your vehicle:
• The exhaust system sounds strange • Drive it only with all the windows
or different. down to blow out any CO; and
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)

160
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if {CAUTION:
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
{CAUTION: PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
Idling the engine with the climate control your vehicle when the engine is running
system off could allow dangerous exhaust unless you have to. If you have left the
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution engine running, the vehicle can move
under Engine Exhaust on page 160. suddenly. You or others could be injured.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let To be sure your vehicle will not move,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your even when you are on fairly level ground,
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at always set the parking brake and move
the highest setting. One place this can the shift lever to PARK (P).
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 400.

161
 Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer with OnStar®, Compass and
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to
roll, even if the shift lever is in PARK (P). Temperature Display
So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
gear — not in NEUTRAL. Always set the automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level
parking brake. to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle corner of the mirror face that shows the compass
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on reading and the outside temperature.
page 157. Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on bottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System on
page 422. page 173 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

162
Temperature and Compass Display Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button, located to the far The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
left, briefly to turn the compass/temperature automatically each time the ignition is started.
display on or off. To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to following:
be calibrated. For more information, see “Compass 1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
Calibration” following. the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not,
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the press and hold the on/off button for
approximately six seconds until the green light
following:
comes on, indicating that the mirror is in
1. Press and hold the on/off button for automatic dimming mode.
approximately four seconds until either a
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
flashing F or C appears.
by pressing and holding the on/off button for
2. Press the button again to change the display approximately six seconds, until the green
to the desired unit of measurement. After indicator light turns off.
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the
new unit will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed
for an extended period of time, see your
dealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay in
updating the temperature is normal.

163
Compass Calibration Compass Variance
The compass may need calibration if one of the The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
following occurs: factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
• After approximately five seconds, the display to compensate for compass variance if the
does not show a compass heading, N for vehicle is outside of zone eight. Under certain
North, for example, there may be a strong circumstances, as during a long distance
magnetic field interfering with the compass. cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
Such interference may be caused by a compass variance. Compass variance is the
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
holder, or a similar magnetic item. geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, the compass could give
• The compass does not display the correct false readings.
heading and the compass zone variance
is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push the on/off button for approximately
12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.

164
To adjust for compass variance, do the following: 3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the
1. Find your current location and variance desired zone number appears in the
zone number on the following zone map. display. Release the button. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the
new zone number will be locked in and
the compass/temperature display will return.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and

a zone number appears in the display. The
compass is now in zone mode.

165
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Temperature Display
with Compass and Temperature The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
Display compass/temperature button. Pressing the
compass/temperature button once briefly, will
Your vehicle may have this mirror. When on, an toggle the display reading on and off. To alternate
automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
level to minimize glare from lights behind you Celsius, press and hold the compass/temperature
after dark. button for approximately three seconds until the
display blinks F and C. After approximately
The mirror also includes a dual display in the
five seconds of inactivity, the display will stop
upper right corner of the mirror with the compass
blinking and display the last selection made.
reading and the outside temperature.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, see your
Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the display dealer.
on or off.

166
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation • The compass does not display the correct
heading and the compass zone variance
O: Press this button to turn the automatic is set correctly.
dimming feature on or off. The indicator light to In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
the left of the button will turn on to indicate when mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
the feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off, push in the compass/temperature button for
it will remain off until it is turned back on, or until approximately nine seconds or until CAL is
the vehicle is restarted. displayed.
Compass Operation The compass can be calibrated by driving the
Press the compass/temperature button once vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
briefly to turn the display on or off. display reads a direction.

Compass Calibration Compass Variance

The compass may need calibration if one of the The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
following occurs: factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if the
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle. vehicle is outside zone eight. Under certain
• After approximately five seconds, the display circumstances, as during a long distance
does not show a compass heading, N for cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
North, for example, there may be a strong compass variance. Compass variance is the
magnetic field interfering with the compass. difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
Such interference may be caused by a geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad compass variance, your compass could give false
holder, or a similar magnetic item. readings.

167
To adjust for compass variance: 3. Press the compass/temperature button on the
1. Find your current location and variance zone bottom of the mirror until the new zone
number on the following zone map. number appears in the display. After you stop
pressing the button, the display will show a
compass direction within a few seconds.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Manual Mirrors

Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see
the side of your vehicle and have a clear view of
objects behind you. The mirrors can be folded
in to enter narrow areas.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and
add-on convex mirror attachments may adversely
2. Press and hold the compass/temperature affect mirror performance.
button for six seconds until a zone number
appears in the display.

168
Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors These mirrors can be manually folded forward or
rearward. The lower portion of the mirror is
convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so
you can see more from the driver’s seat. The
convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the
driver’s preferred position for better vision.
Your vehicle may have outside heated mirrors
which help clear them of condensation, snow, and
ice. When the rear window defogger button is
pressed, the heated mirrors are also turned on.
Only the upper glass of the mirror is heated.
The lower convex part of the mirror is not heated.
If your vehicle has trailer towing type mirrors, they Your mirror may also have a turn signal arrow
can be adjusted so you can have a clear view that will flash in the direction of the turn or
of the objects behind you. Manually pull out lane change.
the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.

169
Outside Power Mirrors To adjust each mirror, press one of the four
arrows located on the control pad to move the
If your vehicle is mirror in the direction you want it to go. Adjust
equipped with outside each outside mirror so that you can see a little of
power mirrors, the your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.
controls are located on The mirrors may also include a memory function
the driver’s door that works with the memory seats. See Memory
armrest. Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for
more information.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to
prevent damage when going through an automatic
car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,
Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror or (B) to push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to
select the passenger’s side mirror. Press either their original unfolded position before driving.
(A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.

170
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded
manually, they may shake or flutter at normal
If your vehicle is driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded
equipped with outside position. If this happens, you will need to reset the
power foldaway mirrors, mirrors. See “Resetting the Power Foldaway
the controls are Mirrors” next.
located on the driver’s Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
door armrest.
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors
if the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then • The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded
press the arrows located on the four-way position.
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again • The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
to deselect this mirror.
speeds.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again unfold them one time using the mirror controls.
to deselect this mirror. This will reset them to their normal position.
• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
171
Turn Signal Indicator Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors
Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on If your vehicle has the memory package, the
the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in outside mirrors are able to perform the curb view
the direction of the turn or lane change. assist mirror function. This feature may be
Ground Illumination Lamps useful in in allowing the driver to view the curb
when parallel parking. This feature will cause the
The mirrors may also include ground illumination passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a
lamps in the base of the mirror. These lamps preselected position when the vehicle is in
help you see the area near the base of the front REVERSE (R).
doors when it is dark out.
The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror its original position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R) and either a thirty second delay has
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, occurred, the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph
the driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare (12 km/h), or the ignition is turned to off.
of headlamps behind you. This feature is
controlled by the on and off settings found on the This feature can be turned on or off through the
electrochromic inside mirror. See Automatic Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver
Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass Information Center (DIC) on page 260 for more
and Temperature Display on page 162 or information.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass
and Temperature Display on page 166 for more
information.

172
Outside Convex Mirror OnStar® System
Your passenger’s side mirror may have convex
glass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you
can see more from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
other vehicles) look farther away than they
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
really are. If you cut too sharply into the of safety, security, information, and convenience
right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
right. Check your inside mirror or glance designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
over your shoulder before changing lanes. Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
Outside Heated Mirrors 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
The vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
help clear them of condensation, snow, and ice. can contact Roadside Service for you.
When the rear window defogger button is pressed,
the heated mirrors are also turned on. See “Rear
Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 231 or Climate Control
System on page 227 for more information.

173
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the For more information, press the OnStar® button to
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
cancel your OnStar® service at any time by (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
contacting OnStar® as provided below. A complete Location Assistance) may not be available
OnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms until you register with OnStar®.
and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For more Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR • Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or (If equipped)
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. • Link to Emergency Services
Not all OnStar® features are available on all • Roadside Assistance
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to • Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
provide the services described below, or for a • AccidentAssist
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
glove box or visit onstar.com. • OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
OnStar® Services • GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound • OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is 30 complimentary minutes
included for one year from the date of purchase. • OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.

174
Available Services included with Directions OnStar® Virtual Advisor
& Connections® Plan
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
• RideAssist browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
• Information and Convenience Services Owners Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. page 351 for more information.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
button for a few seconds and give the command
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar® Hands-Free Calling feature.
Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar® dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
(1-888-466-7827). Guide for more information.

175
How OnStar® Service Works Not all services are available everywhere,
® particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or at
In order to provide you with OnStar services, your
all times.
vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This OnStar® service that involves location information
information is automatically sent to an OnStar® Call about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
Center at the time of an OnStar® button press, satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN that place as well.
system deploys. The vehicle information usually Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
includes your GPS location and, in the event of a (including adequate battery power) for the OnStar®
crash, additional information regarding the accident equipment to operate. There are other problems
that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the OnStar® cannot control that may prevent OnStar®
direction from which your vehicle was hit). When from providing OnStar® service to you at any
you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar® particular time or place. Some examples are
Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
OnStar® your GPS location so that we can provide accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
you with location-based services. wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle is
Your Responsibility
in a place where OnStar® has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service in that area. You may need to increase the volume of your radio
OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are in to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to the
a place where the wireless service provider OnStar® buttons is red, this means that your system
OnStar® has hired for that area has coverage, is not functioning properly and should be checked
network capacity and reception when the service is by your dealer/retailer. If the light appears clear (no
needed, and technology that is compatible with the light is appearing), your OnStar® subscription has
OnStar® service. expired. You can always press the OnStar® button
to confirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.

176
Universal Home Remote
System
System Identification
Your vehicle may have a Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round LED indicator lights above
Determine which Universal Home Remote your the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
vehicle has and then read the pages following for instructions under Universal Home Remote System
instructions on programming your specific system. Operation (With Three Round LED).
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 602.

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode

(LED) indicator light above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions under
Universal Home Remote System Operation (With
One Triangular LED).

177
Universal Home Remote System Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a Operation (With One Triangular LED)
way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode
interference. (LED) indicator light above the Universal Home
2. This device must accept any interference Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
received, including interference that may Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
cause undesired operation. garage door opener that does not have the
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage
Canada. Operation is subject to the following door opener model manufactured before April 1,
two conditions: 1982. If you have a newer garage door opener
with rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps
1. This device may not cause interference. 6 through 8 to complete the programming of
2. This device must accept any interference your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
received, including interference that may
Read the instructions completely before attempting
cause undesired operation of the device.
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Changes or modifications to this system by other Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
than an authorized service facility could void have another person available to assist you in
authorization to use this equipment. the programming steps
178
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in Programming the Universal Home
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Remote System
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, Follow these steps to program up to three devices:
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons 1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
should be erased for security purposes. See Home Remote buttons, releasing only when
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in the Universal Home Remote indicator light
section. begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold
down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
and do not repeat this step to program a
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to
and objects are clear of the garage door or
the remaining two Universal Home Remote
gate operator you are programming.
buttons.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed 2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping
signal. the indicator light in view.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button and
the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.

179
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and 6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
successfully receives the frequency signal or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
buttons. the motor-head unit.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal 7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
Home Remote button and observe the “Smart” button. The name and color of
indicator light. the button may vary by manufacturer.
If the indicator light stays on continuously, You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
programming is complete and your device 8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
should activate when the Universal Home programmed Universal Home Remote button
Remote button is pressed and released. for two seconds, then release it. Immediately
To program the remaining two Universal Home press and hold the same button a second time
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under for two seconds, then release it. Immediately,
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do press and hold the same button a third time for
not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of two seconds, then release.
the programmed channels. The Universal Home Remote should now
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for activate the rolling-code device.
two seconds and then turns to a constant
To program the remaining two Universal Home
light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
to complete the programming of a rolling-code
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You do
device, most commonly, a garage door
not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all
opener.
previous programming from the Universal Home
Remote buttons.

180
Gate Operator and Canadian Using Universal Home Remote
Programming Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter Remote button for at least half of a second.
signals to time out or quit after several seconds The indicator light will come on while the signal is
of transmission. This may not be long enough being transmitted.
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal Erasing Universal Home Remote
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in Buttons
the same manner. To erase programming from the three Universal
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty Home Remote buttons do the following:
programming a gate operator or garage door 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
opener by using the “Programming Universal until the indicator light begins to flash, after
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where 20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
Remote button while you press and release every
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
button until the frequency signal has been
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
this section.
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Universal Home Remote” to complete. Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.

181
Reprogramming a Single Universal Universal Home Remote System
Home Remote Button Operation (With Three Round LED)
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote System. If there are three round Light
Remote” shown earlier in this section. Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above
For help or information on the Universal Home the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
Remote System, call the customer assistance instructions below.
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices This system provides a way to replace up to three
on page 602. remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home automation devices.

182
Do not use this system with any garage door When programming a garage door, it is advised to
opener that does not have the stop and reverse park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
feature. This includes any garage door opener and objects are clear of the garage door or
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. security device you are programming.
Read the instructions completely before attempting Programming Universal Home
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
Remote — Rolling Code
person available to assist you in programming the Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are
transmitter. Rolling Code units.
Be sure to keep the original remote control Programming a garage door opener involves
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
future programming. You only need the original before you begin. If you do not follow these
remote control transmitter for Fixed Code actions, the device will time out and you will have
programming. It is also recommended that upon to repeat the procedure.
the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons” later in this section.

183
Follow these steps to program up to three devices:

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
outside buttons at the same time for one to or “Smart” button. It can usually be found
two seconds, and immediately release them. where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit and may be a colored
button. Press this button. After you press this
button, you will have 30 seconds to complete
the following steps.

184
 3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and If these instructions do not work, you probably
hold the universal home remote button that have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
you would like to use to control the garage Programming instructions below for a Fixed
door until the garage door moves. The Code garage door opener.
indicator light, above the selected button,
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the Programming Universal Home
button from five to 20 seconds. Remote — Fixed Code
4. Immediately, within one second, release the Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
button when the garage door moves. The Fixed Code units.
indicator light will blink rapidly until
Programming a garage door opener involves
programming is complete.
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
5. Press and release the same button again. before you begin. If you do not follow these
The garage door should move, confirming actions, the device will time out and you will have
that programming is successful and complete. to repeat the procedure.
To program another Rolling Code device such as
an additional garage door opener, a security
device, or home automation device, repeat Steps
1-5, choosing a different function button in
Step 3 than what you used for the garage door
opener.

185
Follow these steps to program up to three devices:

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage

door opener, remove the battery cover on
your hand held transmitter supplied by
the manufacturer of your garage door opener
motor. If you see a row of dip switches
similar to the graphic above, you have a Fixed
Code garage door opener. If you do not see
a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.

186
 2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings
from left to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position,
write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes
you enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions that you wrote down in Step 2, in order from
left to right, into the Universal Home Remote,
Your panel of switches may not appear when completing Step 4.
exactly as they do in the examples above, but
they should be similar. 3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press
all three buttons at the same time for about
The switch positions on your hand-held
three seconds. Release the buttons to
transmitter may be labeled, as follows:
put the Universal Home Remote into
• A switch in the up position may be labeled programming mode.
as “Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be
labeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be
labeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

187
 5. After entering all of the switch positions,
again, firmly press and release all three
buttons at the same time. The indicator lights
will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each 8. Press and release the same button again.
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s The garage door should move, confirming
Universal Home Remote. You will have two that programming is successful and complete.
and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home To program another Fixed Code device such as an
Remote for each switch setting as follows: additional garage door opener, a security device,
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,
choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you
vehicle.
used for the garage door opener.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle
button in the vehicle.

188
Using Universal Home Remote To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
on while the signal is being transmitted. same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above
Reprogramming Universal Home the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
Remote Buttons 2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
buttons will be erased.
repeating the instructions.
For help or information on the Universal Home
Erasing Universal Home Remote Remote System, call the customer assistance
Buttons phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 602.
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell or terminate your lease.

189
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling up on the bottom of
the handle.

Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the
front and rear of the floor console or in the
fold down armrest. The front cupholders can be
adjusted by moving the insert forward or rearward.
You may also have cupholders in the second
and third row seat armrest areas. To access the cupholders in the rear floor console,
pull downward on the lid.

Center Console Storage Area

Your vehicle may have a console compartment
with cupholders between the bucket seats.
To open it, press the button and lift the console
lid open.
The rear of the console has a cupholder that
swings down for the rear seat passenger to use.

190
Luggage Carrier • Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail
The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can be supports. Use the crossrails only to keep the
used to load things on top of the vehicle. load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift the
release lever, on both sides of the rail, up to
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the loosen it. Slide the crossrail to the desired
roof. It may also have crossrails which can be position balancing the force side to side. Press
moved back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the the release lever on both sides of the rail, down
load to the siderails or siderail supports. to tighten it. Try to slide the crossrail back and
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier forth slightly to be sure it is tight.
that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or • If you need to carry long items, move the
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle crossrails as far apart as they will go. Tie the
may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that load to the crossrails and the siderails or
it rests on the slats as far forward as siderail supports. Also tie the load to the
possible and against the side rails, making bumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly that the
sure to fasten it securely. crossrails or siderails are damaged.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your locked into the siderail.
Vehicle on page 407. Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you are (CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
driving, check to make sure the luggage and cargo If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
are still securely fastened. should be taken not to block or damage the
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. CHMSL unit.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof,
cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the
crossrails and siderails to spread the load. Tie
the plywood to the siderail supports.
191
Rear Storage Area Cargo Cover
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment
located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the
driver’s side trim panel. {CAUTION:
To open the utility compartment, turn the knobs
An improperly stored cargo cover could
and swing the compartment door open. The
compartment door can be removed. be thrown about the vehicle during a
collision or sudden maneuver. You or
others could be injured. If you remove the
Rear Seat Armrest
cover, always store it in the proper
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat storage location. When you put it back,
armrest. Pull the loop at the top of the armrest always be sure that it is securely
down to access the cupholders. reattached.

If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it

to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To use the cover, do the following:
1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining
sockets on the cargo area trim panels.

192
To return the cover to the retracted position, do To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following:
the following: 1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the rearward with the round surface facing down.
cover posts from the retaining sockets. 2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place
2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted the cover end cap into the slot in the
position. passenger’s side trim panel.
To remove the cover, from a regular wheelbase 3. Move the other end of the cover forward and
model, do the following: hold it next to the driver’s side trim panel slot.
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder. 4. Press the end caps in, this will allow the cover
2. Then, grasping the driver’s side cover to fit into the trim slot.
end cap, push the cover end cap toward the 5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sure
passenger’s side of the vehicle. it is secure.
3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out of On the extended wheelbase models there are
the vehicle. two cover positions. The slots furthest
forward allow the cover to be used if the third
seat is removed or folded down. The cover
can be installed and removed from either side.

193
Cargo Tie Downs
Your vehicle may have cargo tie downs in the rear
cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in and
keep it from moving inside the vehicle.

Cargo Management System

Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo
management system. It can be used for storing
and separating cargo and as a table. The
maximum load is 200 lbs. (91 kg) distributed. It is
located in the rear of the vehicle on upper or
lower horizontal guides. There are two vertical
curved guides that connect the upper and To adjust the system from the upper position to
lower horizontal guides together. The system has the lower position, do the following:
three rollers on each side. The system has a
release lever located in the center of the grab 1. Squeeze and hold the release lever to retract
handle. This will engage and disengage a locator the locator pin.
pin. This is used in adjusting and positioning 2. Pull the system back until the front rollers
the system. reach the vertical curved guides.
The cargo management system can be positioned 3. Lower the front rollers to the lower guides and
on the upper or lower horizontal guides. pull the system back until the middle set of
rollers clear the upper guides.

194
 4. Lower the system until the middle rollers are To utilize the cargo management system as a
lined up with lower guides. While holding in table feature, squeeze the release lever and pull
the release lever, push the system forward the system towards you until the locator pin
until all three sets of rollers are on the guides. reaches the next hole. The system will extend out
5. Release the lever and push the system until of the vehicle. The liftgate cannot be closed in
the locator pin reaches the locator hole. this position. Do not operate the vehicle with
liftgate open.
To adjust the system from the lower position to
the upper position, do the following: The cargo management system can be removed
from the vehicle. This procedure should be
1. Squeeze and hold the release lever to retract completed by two people. While squeezing the
the locator pin. release lever, pull the system back until the rollers
2. Pull the system back and lift until the middle clear the guides. To reinstall the system, align
rollers can be placed into the upper guides. the rollers to the guides, squeeze the release lever
3. Push the system forward until the front rollers and push into position.
are lined up with the vertical curved guides.
4. Push down on the rear of the system and
raise the front rollers up the vertical curved
guides.
5. Push the system forward until all three sets of
rollers are resting on the guides and release
the lever to engage the locating pin into
the hole.

195
On one side of the system is a retractable
storage area.

Slide the hinge covers to the center of each side.

This will keep the sides of the storage system
To access, pull the handle in the center of the stationary and allow it to stay upright. Inside the
system up. system are two removable dividers. To remove,
unhook the loops at the ends of each divider.
When not in use, slide the hinge covers back and
the storage system will fold back down. Press
down on the storage cover to lock it into place.
To utilize the cupholders, follow the procedure for
removing the system from the vehicle.

196
Sunroof Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the
sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver’s side
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding switch until the sunroof reaches the desired
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition position. To close the sunroof, press and hold the
needs to be turned to ON, or Retained Accessory front of the driver’s side switch until the sunroof
Power (RAP) must be active. When RAP is active, reaches the desired position. The sunshade
the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the will open automatically with the sunroof, but can
ignition is turned off, or until a front door is opened. also be opened manually.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 141
for more information. The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which
stops the sunroof from opening to the full-open
There are two switches position. From the comfort stop position, press the
in the overhead console rear of the driver’s side switch a second time to
that operate the open the sunroof to the full-open position.
sunroof. When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract
when the sunroof is closed.

197
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open
the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of feature. From the closed position, press the rear
the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open of the passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof.
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a
the switch a second time. To express-close second time. To close the sunroof, press and hold
the sunroof, fully press and release the front of the the front of the passenger’s side switch. To
driver’s side switch. The sunroof will close stop the sunroof partway, release the switch.
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press
the switch a second time. The sunshade will Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of
open automatically with the sunroof, but can also the sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch
be opened manually. feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof
from closing at the point of the obstruction.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which The sunroof will then open halfway, and the air
stops the sunroof from opening to the full-open deflector will raise. To close the sunroof once
position. From the comfort stop position, press the it has re-opened, refer to the “Express-Close” or
rear of the driver’s side switch a second time to “Manual-Close” functions described previously.
open the sunroof to the full-open position. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and there is
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will an object in the path of the sunroof when it
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
when the sunroof is closed. and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once
it has re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close”
or “Express-Close” functions described previously.

198
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 202 Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 219
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 204 Dome Lamps ............................................. 219
Other Warning Devices ............................. 204 Dome Lamp Override ................................ 219
Horn .......................................................... 204 Entry Lighting ............................................ 220
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 204 Exit Lighting .............................................. 220
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 205 Reading Lamps ......................................... 220
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 206 Electric Power Management ...................... 220
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 207 Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 221
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 207 Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 207 Assist (URPA) ........................................ 222
Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 208 Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 225
Windshield Washer .................................... 209 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 227
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 210 Climate Controls ......................................... 227
Cruise Control ........................................... 211 Climate Control System ............................. 227
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 215 Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 231
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 216 Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 238
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 216 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 217 System .................................................. 239
Fog Lamps ................................................ 218 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .................... 218 and Electronic Climate Controls ............... 240

199
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 242 Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 257
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 243 Security Light ............................................ 258
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 244 Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 258
Trip Odometer ........................................... 244 Cruise Control Light .................................. 258
Tachometer ............................................... 244 Highbeam On Light ................................... 259
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 244 Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 259
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 245 Fuel Gage ................................................. 259
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 245 Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 260
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 246 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 260
Charging System Light .............................. 248 DIC Operation and Displays
Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 249 (With DIC Buttons) ................................. 261
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 249 DIC Operation and Displays
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 251 (Without DIC Buttons) ............................ 267
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 252 DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 270
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 252 DIC Vehicle Customization
Tire Pressure Light .................................... 253 (With DIC Buttons) ................................. 280
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 253
Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 256

200
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) ......................................... 290 XM Radio Messages ................................. 335
Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with Navigation/Radio System ........................... 337
a Single CD Player) ............................... 291 Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 337
Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 348
a CD and DVD Player) .......................... 292 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 350
Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 351
a Six-Disc CD Player) ............................ 293 Radio Reception ........................................ 352
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 294 Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 353
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) ................. 305 Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 353
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Rear Side Window Antenna ....................... 354
Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 321 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 354
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD
and DVD Player) .................................... 327

201
Instrument Panel Overview

United States version shown; Canada similar

202
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on M. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 204.
page 238. N. Horn. See Horn on page 204.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn O. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 205. Steering Wheel Controls on page 351.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
Cluster on page 243. on page 227 or Dual Automatic Climate
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard Controls (If Equipped). See Dual Automatic
Warning Flashers on page 204. Climate Control System on page 231.
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Q. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory
Operation on page 145. Power Outlet(s) on page 225. Cigarette Lighter
F. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Tow/Haul Mode on page 149. Lighter on page 227.
G. Driver Information Center Controls. See Driver R. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped). See
Information Center (DIC) on page 260. StabiliTrak® System on page 363. Pedal Adjust
Button (If Equipped). See Adjustable Throttle
H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on and Brake Pedal on page 143. Rear Park Assist
page 290. Disable Button (If Equipped). See Ultrasonic
I. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 222.
page 215. Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button
J. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp (If Equipped). See Windshield Washer on
Override on page 219. page 209. Power Running Boards Disable
K. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped). Button (If Equipped). See Power Running
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 150. Boards on page 131.
L. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 190.
page 211.

203
Hazard Warning Flashers Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them
also let police know you have a problem. up at the side of the road about 300 feet
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on (100 m) behind your vehicle.
and off.

The hazard warning

Horn
flasher button is located To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
on top of the steering steering wheel.
column.
Tilt Wheel
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel, that lets you adjust
the steering wheel before driving. Raising it to
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what the highest level gives more room to exit and enter
ignition position the key is in, and even if the your vehicle.
key is not in the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.

204
 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering column

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the includes the following:
lower left side of the column. G (Turn and Lane Change Signals): See
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 206.
the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and release the lever to lock 53 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer):
the wheel in place. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 207.
Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 207.
N (Windshield Wipers): See Windshield Wipers
on page 207.

205
L (Windshield Washer): See Windshield An arrow on the
Washer on page 209. instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): See Rear Window direction of the turn or
Wiper/Washer on page 210. lane change.
Z (Rear Wiper): See Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 210.
= (Rear Wiper Wash): See Rear Window As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash more quickly than normal, a signal
Wiper/Washer on page 210.
bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not
see your turn signal.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a
you to signal a turn or a lane change. blown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or page 564.
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
Turn Signal On Chime
automatically.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever for
mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash
less than one second until the arrow starts to flash.
of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL
This will cause the turn signals to automatically
ON will also appear in the Driver Information
flash three times. It will flash six times if tow-haul
Control (DIC). To turn the chime and message off,
mode is active. Holding the turn signal lever for
move the turn signal lever to the off position.
more than one second will cause the turn signals to
flash until you release the lever. The lever will
return by itself when it is released.
206
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer If your headlamps are in the automatic position or
on low beam, your high-beam headlamps will
53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): turn on. They will stay on as long as you hold the
To change the headlamps from low to high beam, lever toward you. The high-beam indicator on
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To the instrument panel cluster will come on. Release
return to low-beam headlamps, pull the the lever to return to normal operation.
multifunction lever toward you. Then release it.
Windshield Wipers
When the high beams
are on, this indicator Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
light on the instrument blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
panel cluster will also windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged
be on. wiper blades may not clear the windshield well,
making it harder to see and drive safely. If
the blades do become damaged, install new
blades or blade inserts. For more information, see
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
Flash-to-Pass page 505.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
This feature lets you use your high-beam circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
you want to pass. It works even if your headlamps
are in the automatic position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,
then release it.

207
The windshield wipers are controlled by turning Rainsense™ II Wipers
the band with the wiper symbol.
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield
8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wipers, the moisture sensor is located next to the
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers inside rearview mirror and is mounted on the
start. Then let go. The wipers will stop after one windshield. When active, these sensors are able
wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for more wipe to detect moisture on the windshield and
cycles. automatically turn on the wipers.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers
to off. must be set to one of the five delay settings on the
multifunction lever. Each of the five settings
6 (Delay): The wiper speed can be set for a long adjusts the sensitivity of the rainsensor.
or short delay between wiping cycles. This can Since different drivers have different setting
be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band preferences, it is recommended that the mid-range
to choose the delay time. The closer to the top setting (position 3) be used initially. For more
of the lever, the shorter the delay. wipes, select the higher settings; for fewer wipes,
select the lower settings located closer to the
6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from off position on the multifunction lever.
you to the first solid band past the delay settings,
for steady wiping at low speed.
1 (High Speed): Turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings, for
high-speed wiping.

208
The rainsensor will automatically control the Windshield Washer
frequency of the wipes from the off setting to the
high speed setting according to the weather
conditions. The wipers can be left in a rainsense
mode even when it is not raining.
{CAUTION:
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will In freezing weather, do not use your
turn on automatically if the exterior lamp control is
washer until the windshield is warmed.
in the AUTO position.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash on the windshield, blocking your vision.
with the wipers on can damage them. Turn
the wipers off when going through an
automatic car wash. L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the
multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will
clear the window and then either stop or return to
your preset speed.
Heated Windshield Washer
If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer
fluid system it may be used to help clear ice,
snow, tree sap, or bugs from your windshield.

209
 The button is located in Rear Window Wiper/Washer
the switchbank under
the climate controls.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Push the heated washer fluid button to activate Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
the heated windshield washer fluid system. on the windshield, blocking your vision.
The indicator light will flash. This activation will
initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles. The
first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to The rear wiper control is located on the turn
40 seconds to occur, depending on outside signal/multifunction lever.
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a
take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining wiper position.
cycles to begin. Press the button again to turn
off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it 9 (Off): To turn the wiper off, slide the lever to
will automatically turn off after four wipe cycles this setting.
have been completed.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): To turn on the rear wiper
When the heated windshield washer fluid system delay, slide the lever to this setting.
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer Z (Rear Wiper): To turn on the rear wiper, slide
nozzles for a short period of time before washer the lever to this setting.
fluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

210
= (Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear Cruise Control
wiper wash, push the button on the end of the turn
signal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid
on the rear window. The wipers will clear the rear {CAUTION:
window and either stop or return to your preset
speed. For more washer cycles, press and
hold the button. Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if So, do not use your cruise control on
the liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
or liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on,
the wiper will return to the parked position Cruise control can be dangerous on
and stop. slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of

about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, cruise control
is turned off.

211
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and T (On/Off): This button can both activate and
begins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise turn off the system. The indicator light on the
control, the cruise control will automatically button turns on when cruise control is on and turns
disengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 363. off when cruise control is off.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it
again, you may turn the cruise control back on. + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to
The cruise control a previously set speed.
buttons are located on
left side of the SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the
steering wheel. speed or make the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise
control without erasing the set speed from
memory.

212
Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. speed and then you apply the brake. This
The cruise control light on the instrument panel shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need
cluster will come on after the cruise control to reset it.
has been set to the desired speed. Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, press the +RES button on your steering
wheel. The vehicle will go back to the previous set
{CAUTION: speed and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
If you leave your cruise control on when Control
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do To increase the cruise speed while using cruise
control:
not want to. You could be startled and
even lose control. Keep the cruise control • Press and hold the +RES button on the
switch off until you want to use cruise steering wheel until you reach your new
control. desired speed, then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time you do this,
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button. you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

213
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Using Cruise Control on Hills
Control How well your cruise control will work on hills
To reduce your speed while using cruise control: depends upon your speed, load, and the
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
steering wheel until the desired lower speed is you may have to step on the accelerator pedal
reached, then release it. to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower
• To slow down in very small amounts, press gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Of
the SET– button on the steering wheel course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise
briefly. Each time you do this, the vehicle will control. Many drivers find this to be too much
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Ending Cruise Control
Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. • Step lightly on the brake pedal.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your
vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise • Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
speed. • Press the On/Off button on the steering
wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the
ignition, the cruise control set speed memory is
erased.

214
Exterior Lamps AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to automatically turn on the headlamps at
The exterior lamps normal brightness, together with the following:
control is located on the • Parking Lamps
instrument panel to • Instrument Panel Lights
the left of the steering • Taillamps
wheel.
• License Plate Lamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
It controls the following systems: position to turn on the parking lamps together with
• Headlamps the following:
• Taillamps • Instrument Panel Lights
• Parking Lamps • Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps • License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights 2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
The exterior lamps control has four positions: to turn on the headlamps together with the
following lamps listed below.
9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to turn
off the automatic headlamps and daytime When the headlamps are turned on while the
running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp vehicle is on, the headlamps will turn off
control to the off position again will turn the automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
automatic headlamps or DRL back on. turned off. When the headlamps are turned on
while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will continue
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position to stay on. Turn the control to the off position to
will only work for vehicles that are shifted into turn the headlamps off or the battery will be
the PARK (P) position. drained.
215
A warning chime will sound if you open the The DRL system will come on when the following
driver’s door when the ignition switch is off and conditions are met:
the headlamps are on. • The ignition is on.
• Parking Lamps • The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• Instrument Panel Lights • The transmission is not in PARK (P).
• Taillamps • The light sensor determines it is daytime.
• License Plate Lamps When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will
be on. The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps
Headlamps on Reminder will not be on. The instrument panel will not be
lit up either.
A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps
or parking lamps are manually turned on and When it begins to get dark, the automatic
your ignition is off and a door is open. To disable headlamp system will switch from DRL to the
the chime, turn the light off. headlamps.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) control to the OFF position and then release.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transaxle
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier must be in the PARK (P) position, before the DRL
for others to see the front of your vehicle during lamps can be turned off.
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before regular headlamp system when you need it.
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

216
Automatic Headlamp System There is a delay in the transition between the
daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp
headlamp system will turn on the headlamps at the systems so that driving under bridges or bright
normal brightness, along with the taillamps, overhead street lights does not affect the system.
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrument The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only
panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim. be affected when the light sensor detects a change
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
the exterior lamps switch to the off position If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
and then release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, automatic headlamp system will come on
the transaxle must be in the PARK (P) position, immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will
before the automatic headlamp system can take approximately one minute for the automatic
be turned off. headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top bright enough outside. During that delay, your
of the instrument panel in the defroster grille instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as
that regulates when the automatic headlamps turn usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
on. Be sure it is not covered, or the headlamps control is in the full bright position. See Instrument
will come on whenever the ignition is on. Panel Brightness on page 219.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast vehicle. You can program this feature using the
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal. Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when needed.

217
Fog Lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp
- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps, If your vehicle has this feature, this button includes
the button is located on the instrument panel wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified
to the left of the steering column and below the service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
dome lamp override button. This button is located
The ignition must be in RUN and the parking on the overhead
lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work. console.
To turn the fog lamps on, press the fog lamps
button. A light comes on in the instrument
panel cluster to let you know that the fog lamps
are on. Press the button again to turn the fog
lamps off.
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
When the fog lamps are turned on, the low-beam mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the
headlamps automatically turn on. button will activate the lamp and illuminate an
The fog lamps turn off while you change to indicator light at the bottom of this button. Pressing
high-beam headlamps. When the high-beam the top of the button will turn off the roof mounted
headlamps go off, the fog lamps will come lamp and indicator.
on again. The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at
Fog lamps should only be used in foggy conditions 30 amps, so the total current draw of the attached
since they could be distracting to oncoming lamps should be less than this value. The
drivers in clear weather conditions. attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are
two blunt cut wires located above the overhead
Some localities have laws that require the console, a dark green switched power wire and a
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps. black ground wire.

218
For further information on roof mount emergency Dome Lamps
lamp installation, please visit the GM Upfitter
website at www.gmupfitters.com or contact your The dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
dealer. The dome lamps can also be turned on by
If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may turning the knob, located next to the exterior lamps
have the snow plow prep package. For further control, clockwise to the farthest position. In this
information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar position, the dome lamps will remain on whether a
Equipment on page 412. door is opened or closed.

Instrument Panel Brightness Dome Lamp Override

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the dome
controls the brightness of the instrument panel override button, located next to the exterior lamps
lights. control, to keep the dome lamps off when a
The knob for this feature is located next to the door is open. To set the lamps to the automatic
headlamp control. operation, press the button again so that it is
extended. With the button in this position,
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to the dome lamps will come on when a door is
adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights. opened.
Turn the knob clockwise to return the instrument
panel cluster or radio display to full brightness
when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. To
turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob to the
farthest clockwise position.

219
Entry Lighting Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the
Your vehicle has an illuminated entry feature. button located next to the lamp.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
come on if the dome override button is in the
extended position. If the dome override button is
pressed in, the lamps will not come on. Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
Exit Lighting that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on
performance and extended life of the battery.
when the key is removed from the ignition. They
will turn off automatically in 20 seconds. The lights When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
will not come on if the dome override button is voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
pressed in. back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
Reading Lamps If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
If your vehicle has reading lamps they are located may see the voltage move up or down. This is
on the overhead console. normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button displayed.
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press
the button again.

220
The battery can be discharged at idle if the Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
electrical loads are very high. This is true for without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
all vehicles. This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action, this action may
(alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
idle to produce all the power that is needed for very Information Center (DIC) message might be
high electrical loads. displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Service
A high electrical load occurs when several of the Battery Charging System. If this message is
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, displayed, it is recommended that the driver
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270.
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets. Battery Run-Down Protection
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the This feature shuts off the dome, and reading
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It when the ignition is off. This will keep the
can increase engine idle speed to generate more battery from running down.
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.

221
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) {CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system it is designed to help The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)
you park while in Reverse (R). It operates only at system does not replace driver vision.
speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helps URPA does not:
make parking easier and helps you avoid colliding • Operate above speeds of
with objects such as parked vehicles. The 5 mph (8 km/h).
URPA system detects objects that are close to the • Detect objects more than 8 feet
rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches (2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. This
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk distance may be less during warmer
level. The system detects objects up to 8 feet or humid weather.
(2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The URPA sensors • Detect objects that are below the
determine how close these objects are from bumper, underneath the vehicle, or
your bumper within this area. that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
So if you do not use proper care before
backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,
pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even
though the vehicle has the URPA system,
always check carefully before backing up
by checking behind your vehicle.

222
 The URPA display is The red light in the URPA display will also be lit if
located near the the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). If the vehicle
passenger side rear has a Driver Information Center (DIC), PARKING
window and can ASSIST OFF will display on the screen. URPA
be seen by looking over automatically turns back on each time the vehicle
your right shoulder. is started.

How the System Works

When the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),
the rear display will briefly come on to let you
know the display is operating correctly. URPA
The URPA display has three color-coded lights. comes on automatically when the shift lever
The lights are used to provide distance and system is moved into REVERSE (R).
information, along with beeps that will be heard
The system does not work at a reverse speed
through the speakers.
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this,
URPA can be turned off the red light on the rear display will flash.
by pressing the rear park
aid disable button
located next to the radio.
The indicator light will
come on to indicate that
URPA is off.

223
How the System Works when Backing When the System Does Not Seem to
If the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detects Work Properly
objects close to the rear bumper. The first time an If the URPA system will not activate due to a
object is detected a single beep will sound. If an temporary condition, the message PARKING
object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC screen
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), the and a red light will come on the URPA display
following describes what will occur based on your when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R).
distance to a detected object located behind the This occurs under the following conditions:
vehicle:
• The driver disables the system.
• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and
8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on. • The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and • A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on. bicycle or an object was hanging out of
your trunk during your last drive when you
• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and turned off the vehicle. If the attached objects
23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/ are removed from your vehicle before the start
amber/red) will be on. of your next drive, the system will return to
• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a normal operation unless an object is detected
beeping sound will repeat for a short time and when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash. (R). If this occurs, URPA assumes the object
is still attached, so you will have to wait
until the vehicle is driven forward above
15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA will return to
normal operation.

224
 • The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So, For Driver Information Center messages related to
be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper URPA, see DIC Warnings and Messages on
free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. page 270.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your If the vehicle bumper is damaged, the URPA
Vehicle on page 557. If the DIC still displays system may not work properly. Take the vehicle to
the PARKING ASSIST OFF message your dealer to repair the system.
after cleaning the bumper and driving forward
at a speed of at least 15 mph (25 km/h),
see your dealer. Accessory Power Outlet(s)
• Other conditions that may affect system Accessory power outlets can be used to
performance include vibrations from a connect auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a
jackhammer or the compression of air brakes cellular telephone or CB radio. The outlet can
on a very large truck or other mechanical accept electrical equipment up to a maximum of
devices that interfere with URPA performance. 20 amperes.
• When URPA is disabled without driver There are four accessory power outlets. There are
action and the driver attempts to turn URPA two under the climate controls, one on the back
back on by pressing the rear park aid of the floor console and a additional accessory
button, the indicator light will flash for power outlet in the rear cargo area on the
3 seconds and then stay lit to indicate that passenger side.
URPA is off.
As always, drivers should use care when backing
up a vehicle. Always look behind you, being
sure to check for other vehicles, obstructions and
blind spots.

225
To use the power outlet, lift the spring cap and Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
insert electrical 12V device plug. To close your vehicle may damage it or keep other
the power outlet, remove 12V electrical device components from working as they should. The
plug and the spring cap will close. repairs would not be covered by your
The accessory power outlets are powered, even warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
with the ignition off. Continuing to use power maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
outlets while the ignition is off may cause Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
the vehicle’s battery to run down. electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged
follow the proper installation instructions included
into a power outlet, the battery may drain
with the equipment. Do not use equipment
causing your vehicle not to start or damage to
exceeding the maximum amperage rating of
the battery. This would not be covered by
20 amperes.
the warranty. Always unplug all electrical
devices when turning off your vehicle. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
Certain power accessory plugs may not be cause damage not covered by your warranty.
compatible to the accessory power outlet and Do not hang any type of accessory or
could result in blown adapter or vehicle fuses. accessory bracket from the plug because the
If you experience a problem, see your dealer for power outlets are designed for accessory
additional information on the accessory power power plugs only.
plugs.

226
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if Climate Control System
equipped. Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
With this system you can control the heating,
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation of
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes your vehicle.
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way,
and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out
by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating does not let the lighter back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can occur to the Manual Operation
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
is heating. to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

227
To change the current mode, select one of the The right knob can also be used to select defog or
following: defrost mode. For more information, see
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets. By positioning the right knob between two modes,
a combination of those two modes is selected.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to The air conditioning compressor will be on unless
the instrument panel outlets and to the floor the outside temperature is close to freezing.
outlets. The flow can be divided between vent and
floor outlets depending upon where the knob is 9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
placed between the settings. A little air is directed counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
towards the windshield and side window outlets. speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and to turn the front system off.
warmer air to the floor outlets.
? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed,
the floor outlets, with some of the air directed an indicator light will come on.
to the windshield, side window outlets, and second
row floor outlets. In this mode, the system will This mode keeps outside air from entering the
automatically select outside air. Recirculation vehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air and
cannot be selected when in Floor Mode. prevent odors from entering your vehicle.
Recirculation may also help cool the air inside your
vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside
the vehicle is less than the outside temperature.

228
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, # (Air Conditioning): Press this button on the
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select left knob to turn the air conditioning system on or
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator off. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light will
will flash three times and turn off. The air come on to let you know that the air conditioning
conditioning compressor will also come on when has been activated.
this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode
the windows may fog when the weather is cold and On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
defrost mode and increase the fan speed. the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.
Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
the button again, or turning off the engine. The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
AUX (Auxiliary): Pressing this button will turn the amount of water dripping underneath your
rear heating and air conditioning on. See Rear vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 239 This is normal.
or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls on page 240 for Defogging and Defrosting
more information.
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of
Temperature Control: Rotate the thumbwheels high humidity (moisture) condensing on the
up or down to increase or decrease the temperature cool window glass. This can be minimized if the
on the driver’s side or the passenger side of the climate control system is used properly. There are
vehicle for the dual zone system. two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield. Turn the right knob clockwise to select
the defog or defrost mode.

229
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the Rear Window Defogger
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
passengers. This mode directs air to the
remove fog from the rear window.
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.
When you select this mode, the system turns < (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
off recirculation and runs the air conditioning on the right knob to turn on the rear window
compressor unless the outside temperature is defogger. The system will automatically turn off
close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot several minutes after it has been activated. The
be selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
the vehicle until all the windows are clear. button again or by turning off the engine. Do not
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
remove fog or frost from the windshield more If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,
quickly. This mode directs a portion of the air to the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost
the windshield and side window vents and some to from the surface of the mirror when the rear
the floor vents. In this mode, the system will window defog button is pressed.
automatically force outside air into your vehicle.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
will run automatically in this setting, unless the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
outside temperature is close to freezing. Do
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.

230
Dual Automatic Climate Control Driver’s Side Temperature Control
System The driver’s side temperature buttons are used to
adjust the temperature of the air coming through
With this system, you can control the heating, the system on the driver’s side. The temperature
cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle. Your can be adjusted even if the system is turned
vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system off. This is possible since outside air will always
described later in this section. flow through the system as the vehicle is moving
forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease
the cabin temperature. The driver side
temperature display will show the temperature
setting decreasing or increasing.

You can select different climate control settings for

the driver and passengers.

231
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Automatic Operation
The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
to change the temperature of the air coming active the system will control the inside
through the system on the passenger’s side of the temperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed.
vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even
if the system is turned off. This is possible Use the steps below to place the entire system in
since outside air will always flow through the automatic mode:
system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it 1. Press the AUTO button.
is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” When AUTO is selected, the display will
later in this section. change to show the current temperature(s)
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease and AUTO will be lit on the display. The
the cabin temperature. The passenger side current delivery mode and fan speed will also
display will show the temperature setting be displayed for approximately 5 seconds.
decreasing or increasing. When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to operation and air inlet will be automatically
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. run when the outside temperature is over
When the passenger’s temperature setting is set about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be
different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air
the PASS button will illuminate and both the driver’s inlet may automatically switch to recirculate
side and passenger’s side temperature displays will inside air to help quickly cool down your
be shown. vehicle. The light on the button will illuminate
in recirculation.

232
 2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature. To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F system will delay turning on the fan until warm air
(23°C) temperature setting and allow about is available. The length of delay depends on
20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use the the engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan
driver’s or passenger’s temperature buttons to switch will override this delay and change the
adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If fan to a selected speed.
you choose the temperature setting of 60°F
(15°C), the system will remain at the maximum
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the
climate control system. Outside air will still enter
cooling setting. If you choose the temperature
the vehicle, and will be directed to the floor.
setting of 90°F (32°C), the system will remain
This direction can be changed by pressing the
at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either
mode button. Recirculation can be selected once
maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to
you have selected vent or bi-level mode. The
heat or cool any faster.
temperature can also be adjusted using either
Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on temperature button. If you adjust the air delivery
the top of the instrument panel near the mode or temperature settings with the system
windshield. This sensor regulates air temperature off, the display will illuminate briefly to show you
based on sun load and also turns on your the settings and then return off. Press the
headlamps. For more information on the solar on/off button or the up down arrows on the fan
sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section. switch, the defrost button, AUTO button, or the air
conditioning button to turn the system on when
it is off.

233
Manual Operation The air delivery mode setting will be displayed and
the AUTO light will turn off. The fan will remain
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
under automatic control.
fan speed.
y9 z (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols H (Vent): This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
allow you to manually adjust the fan speed.
Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
down arrow to decrease fan speed. the instrument panel outlets and half to the floor
Pressing one of these buttons when the system is outlets. The flow can be divided between vent and
off will turn the system on. Pressing one of floor outlets depending upon where the knob is
these buttons when in automatic control will place placed between the settings. A little air is directed
the fan under manual control. The fan setting towards the windshield and side window outlets.
will remain displayed and the AUTO light will turn Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
off. The air delivery mode will remain under warmer air to the floor outlets.
automatic control.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
yN z (Mode): Press the mode up and down the floor outlets, with some of the air directed
buttons to manually change the direction of to the windshield, side window outlets, and second
the airflow in your vehicle. Repeatedly press the row floor outlets. In this mode, the system will
button until the desired mode appears on the automatically select outside air.
display. Pressing one of these buttons when the
system is off will change air delivery mode without
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later
turning the system on. Pressing one of these in this section.
buttons when in automatic control will place the
mode under manual control.

234
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the Air Conditioning
recirculation mode on. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light will come on. # (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and
This mode keeps outside air from entering the off. When air conditioning is selected, an indicator
vehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air and light will come on to let you know that the air
prevent odors from entering your vehicle. conditioning has been activated.
Recirculation may also help cool the air inside
your vehicle more quickly once the temperature Pressing this button when the outside temperature
inside the vehicle is less than the outside is too cool for air conditioning will make the air
temperature. conditioning indicator flash three times and
then turn off to let you know the air conditioning
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, mode is not available. If the air conditioning
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select is on and the outside temperature drops below a
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator temperature which is too cool for air conditioning
will flash three times and turn off. The air to be effective, the air conditioning light will turn off
conditioning compressor will also come on when to show that the air conditioning mode has been
this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode canceled.
the windows may fog when the weather is cold
and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog On hot days, open the windows long enough to let
or defrost mode and increase the fan speed. hot inside air escape. This helps to reduce the
Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also
the button again, or turning off the engine. helps the system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle
while idling or after turning off the engine. This
is normal.
235
Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in The interior temperature sensors located in the
the middle of the instrument panel, monitors headliner above the driver side seat and in
the solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor the headliner above the second row seats
or the system will not work properly. measure the temperature of the air inside your
vehicle.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor
located behind the front grille. This sensor reads
the outside air temperature and helps maintain the
temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on
the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading
in the displayed temperature.

236
The climate control system uses the information 0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or
from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting frost from the windshield more quickly. This
by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and mode directs a portion of the air to the windshield
the air delivery mode. The system may also supply and side window vents and some to the floor
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. vents. In this mode, the system will automatically
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed force outside air into your vehicle. The
to maintain cool outlet temperatures. recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
Defogging and Defrosting will run automatically in this setting, unless
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high the outside temperature is close to freezing. Do
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to Rear Window Defogger
clear fog or frost from your windshield. The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
Use the mode up and down arrows to select the remove fog from the rear window.
defog or defrost modes.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the to turn on the rear window defogger. It will
windows of fog or moisture and warm the automatically turn off several minutes after it has
passengers. This mode directs air to the been activated. The defogger can also be
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. turned off by pressing the button again or by
When you select this mode, the system turns off turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until
recirculation and runs the air conditioning all the windows are clear.
compressor unless the outside temperature is close
to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
237
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview Operation Tips
mirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or • Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,
frost from the surface of the mirror when the snow, or any other obstruction (such as
rear window defog button is pressed. leaves). The heater and defroster will work far
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp better, reducing the chance of fogging the
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not inside of your windows.
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines • When you enter a vehicle in cold weather,
in the rear glass. These actions may damage press the fan up button to the maximum
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be fan level before driving. This helps clear the
covered by your warranty. intake ducts of snow and moisture, and
reduces the chance of fogging the inside of
Outlet Adjustment your window.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on • Keep the air path under the front seats clear
the side of your instrument panel to direct of objects. This helps air to circulate
the airflow. throughout your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may
affect the performance of the heating and air
conditioning system. Check with your
dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of your vehicle.

238
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
If your vehicle has this system, the rear controls
are three knobs located in the headliner. The
system can be controlled from the front controls
as well as the rear controls.
To turn the system on, press the AUX button on
the front climate control system, an indicator will be
lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will
turn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In this Fan Knob
mode, the airflow in the rear will be approximately
the same direction, temperature, and fan speed Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise
as the front. Pressing the AUX button again to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn
will turn the rear system and the indicator off. the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the
rear system off.
If the rear controls are adjusted, the system will
enter a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear Temperature Knob
will then be directed according to the settings of The middle knob on the control panel lets you
rear controls. The rear system can be turned off by select the temperature of the air flowing into the
pressing the AUX button on the front climate passenger area. Turn the knob clockwise
control system and the indicator will turn off. toward the red area for warmer air. Turn the knob
counterclockwise toward the blue area for
cooler air.

239
Mode Knob Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
The right knob on the control panel allows you to System and Electronic Climate
choose the direction of air delivery.
Controls
H (Vent): This setting directs the air through the If your vehicle has this system, the rear heat and
headliner outlets. air conditioning controls are integrated with the
) (Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor rear seat audio controls located in the center
outlets as well as the headliner outlets. The console. The system can be controlled from the
rear system floor outlets are located directly behind front controls as well as the rear controls.
the second row seats. The flow can be divided To turn the system on, press the AUX button on
between vent and floor outlets depending the front climate control system, an indicator will be
upon where the knob is placed between the lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will
settings. turn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In this
mode, the airflow in the rear will be approximately
6 (Floor): This setting directs most of the air the same direction, temperature, and fan speed
through the floor outlets. The rear system as the front. Pressing the AUX button again
floor outlets are located directly behind the second will turn the rear system and the indicator off.
row seats.
If the rear controls are adjusted, the system will
enter a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear
will then be directed according to the settings of
rear controls. The rear system can be turned off by
pressing the AUX button on the front climate
control system and the indicator will turn off.
If the indicator in the front AUX button is off, the
rear system is off.

240
 +/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Press
the + or − buttons to increase or decrease
the cabin temperature. The rear control
temperature display will show the temperature
setting decreasing or increasing.
The display will only indicate climate control
functions when the system is in rear
independent mode.
Manual Operation
y9 z (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seat
audio control panel allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. To decrease airflow, press
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls the button with the fan and down arrow symbol.
Automatic Operation Pressing the fan up button when the system is off
will turn the system on. The air delivery mode
AUTO: Press the mode button until this setting is will remain under automatic control. To turn
selected to control the inside temperature, the the rear system off, keep pressing the button with
air delivery, and the fan speed. AUTO will the fan and down arrow symbol.
illuminate in the display when automatic operation
is active.

241
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
buttons select the temperature of the air flowing into problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
the passenger area. Press the + button for warmer the details show on the next few pages, some
air and press the − button for cooler air. warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If
N (Mode): Press the mode button to manually you are familiar with this section, you should
change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle. not be alarmed when this happens.
Repeatedly press the button until the desired
mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
cycle through the delivery selections. problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there is a problem with your
Warning Lights, Gages, and vehicle.
Indicators When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying please get to know your vehicle’s warning
attention to the warning lights and gages could also lights and gages. They can be a big help.
save you or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with warning lights and
gages. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 270 for more information.

242
Instrument Panel Cluster

United States version shown. Canada similar.

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know
to drive safely and economically.

243
Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per revolutions per minute (rpm).
hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has Safety Belt Reminder Light
been driven, in either miles (used in the United When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
States) or kilometers (used in Canada). chime will sound for several seconds to remind
people to buckle their safety belts. The driver
Trip Odometer safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds. Then it will flash for several
The trip odometer can tell you how far your more. You should buckle your seat belt.
vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip
odometer to zero. This chime and light will
Press the reset button, located on the instrument be repeated if the driver
panel cluster next to the trip odometer display, remains unbuckled
to toggle between the trip odometer and the and the vehicle
regular odometer. Holding the reset button for is in motion.
approximately one second while the trip odometer
is displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor
off, press the reset button. the light will come on.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 101 for
more information.

244
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Airbag Readiness Light
Light There is an airbag readiness light on the
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
START, a chime will sound for several seconds The system checks the airbag’s electrical
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
belt. The passenger safety belt light will also is an electrical problem. The system check
come on and stay on for several seconds, then it includes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,
will flash for several more. the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag
This chime and light will system, see Airbag System on page 90.
be repeated if the
passenger remains This light will come on
unbuckled and when you start your
the vehicle is in motion. vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither

the chime nor the light will come on.
Then the light should go out. This means the
system is ready.

245
 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION: Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after status indicator.
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
United States Canada
after you start your vehicle.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you the passenger airbag status indicator will light
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
your airbag system may not work properly. for several seconds as a system check. Then,
Have your vehicle serviced right away. after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
The airbag readiness light should flash for a or off symbol, to let you know the status of the
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
RUN. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
a problem. passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).

246
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you Even though the passenger sensing
have a rear-facing child restraint installed system is designed to turn off the right
in the right front passenger’s seat, it means front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
that the passenger sensing system has not system detects a rear-facing child
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. A restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be one can guarantee that an airbag will not
seriously injured or killed if the right front deploy under some unusual circumstance,
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is even though it is turned off. We
because the back of the rear-facing child recommend that rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the restraints be secured in the rear seat,
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing even if the airbag is off.
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate passenger sensing system has turned off the right
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat Sensing System on page 101 for more on
in the front.” This is because the risk to the this, including important safety information.
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

247
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights Charging System Light
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger The charging system
sensing system. See your dealer for service. light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is
{CAUTION: not running, as a check
to show you it is working.
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it It should go out once the engine is running. If it
means that something may be wrong with stays on, or comes on while you are driving,
the airbag system. If this ever happens, you may have a problem with the charging system.
have the vehicle serviced promptly, It could indicate that you have problems with the
because an adult-size person sitting in the generator, the generator drive belt, or another
right front passenger seat may not have electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
the protection of the frontal airbag. See Driving while this light is on could drain your
Airbag Readiness Light on page 245. battery.
When this light comes on, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will also display the SERVICE
BATTERY NOT CHARGING SYSTEM message.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for
more information.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner, to reduce the drain on
your battery.
248
Voltmeter Gage This condition is normal since the charging system
is not able to provide full power at engine idle.
When your engine is not As engine speeds are increased, this condition
running, but the ignition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow
is in RUN, this gage the charging system to create full power. If
shows your battery’s there is a problem with the battery charging
state of charge in system, this light will come on or the SERVICE
DC volts. BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will
display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 270 and Charging System Light on page 248
for more information.

Brake System Warning Light

When the engine is running, the gage shows the With the ignition on, the brake system warning
condition of the charging system. The charging light will come on when you set the parking brake.
system regulates voltage based on the state of the If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged,
battery for improved fuel economy and battery a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is
life. The gage may transition from a higher to lower greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
or a lower to higher reading, this is normal. Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
Readings between the low and high warning zones into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
indicate the normal operating range. part can still work and stop you. For good
Readings in the low warning zone may occur braking, though, you need both parts working well.
when a large number of electrical accessories are If the warning light comes on and a chime
operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at sounds there could be a brake problem. Have
an idle for an extended period. your brake system inspected right away.

249
This light may also come on due to low brake
fluid. See Brakes on page 486 for more
information. {CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
United States Canada the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn the road and stop carefully. You may notice
you if there is a problem. that the pedal is harder to push or may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the
light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 417.

250
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning If the regular brake system warning light is also on
you do not have ABS and there is a problem
Light with your regular brakes. In addition to both lights,
you will also hear a chime sound on the first
With the Anti-Lock Brake occurrence of a problem and each time the vehicle
System (ABS), this is shut off and then restarted. See Brake System
light will come on when Warning Light on page 249.
you start your engine
and may stay on for The ABS warning light should come on briefly
several seconds. when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. A chime
will sound when the light stays on. If the regular
brake system warning light is not on, you still have
brakes, but you do not have ABS.

251
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If equipped, this warning
light should come on
briefly when the engine
is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have it

fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are United States Canada
driving, there may be a problem with your
StabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may need This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
service. When this warning light is on, the system It also provides an indicator of how hard your
is off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your vehicle is working. During a majority of the
driving accordingly. operation, the gage will read 210°F (100°C) or less.
This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak® If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal
system is active. for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the
250°F (122°C) mark. If the gage reaches the 260°F
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on (125°C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is
and stays on for an extended period of time working beyond its capacity.
when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs
service. See StabiliTrak® System on page 363 See Engine Overheating on page 473.
for more information.

252
Tire Pressure Light Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This light will come on Check Engine Light
briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN. Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-Board

This light will also come on when one or more of Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
your tires are significantly underinflated. to assure that emissions are at acceptable
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
(DIC), a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message a cleaner environment. The check engine light
will accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
Messages on page 270 for more information. service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
See Tires on page 507 for more information.
assist your service technician in correctly
This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn on diagnosing any malfunction.
solid if a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure
Monitor system.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 for
more information.
253
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with This light will also come on during a malfunction in
this light on, after awhile, the emission controls one of two ways:
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
economy might not be as good, and the engine been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
might not run as smoothly. This could lead emissions and may damage the emission
to costly repairs that might not be covered by control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
your warranty. service may be required.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine, • Light On Steady — An emission control
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system system malfunction has been detected on your
of your vehicle or the replacement of the vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
original tires with other than those of the same required.
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and can cause If the Light is Flashing
this light to come on. Modifications to these The following may prevent more serious damage
systems could lead to costly repairs not to your vehicle:
covered by your warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission • Reducing vehicle speed
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories • Avoiding hard accelerations
and Modifications on page 444. • Avoiding steep uphill grades
This light should come on, as a check to show • If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
engine is not running. If the light does not possible
come on, have it repaired.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

254
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least condition will usually be corrected when the
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” should turn the light off.
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
soon as possible. If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
If the Light Is On Steady See Gasoline Octane on page 447. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
You may be able to correct the emission system efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
malfunction by considering the following: stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully conditions may go away once the engine is
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 451. warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
The diagnostic system can determine if the and cause the light to turn on.
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A
loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to If you experience one or more of these conditions,
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
with the cap properly installed should turn the least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off. light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

255
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Oil Pressure Gage
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly. United States Canada
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil
that critical emission control systems have not pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the
been completely diagnosed by the system. engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate
The vehicle would be considered not ready for pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
inspection. This can happen if you have recently Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
replaced your battery or if your battery has temperature and oil viscosity, but readings
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to above the low pressure zone indicate the normal
evaluate critical emission control systems operating range. When the oil pressure reaches
during normal driving. This may take several days the low pressure zone, the OIL PRESSURE LOW
of routine driving. If you have done this and STOP ENGINE message will appear in the
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer Warnings and Messages on page 270 and Engine
can prepare the vehicle for inspection. Oil on page 459 for more information.
256
A reading in the low pressure zone may be Oil Pressure Light
caused by a dangerously low oil level or some
other problem causing low oil pressure. Check This light will come on
your oil as soon as possible. briefly when you start
your engine.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon {CAUTION:
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced. Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance hot that it catches fire. You or others could
may damage the engine. The repairs would be burned. Check your oil as soon as
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow possible and have your vehicle serviced.
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.

257
That is a check to be sure the light works. If it Fog Lamp Light
does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will
be there to warn you if something goes wrong. The fog lamp light will
When the light comes on and stays on, it means come on when the fog
that oil is not flowing through your engine lamps are in use.
properly. You could be low on oil and you might
have some other system problem.

Security Light
This light flashes when The light will go out when the fog lamps are
the vehicle security turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 218 for more
system is activated. information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control is

turned off. See Cruise Control on page 211 for
more information.

258
Highbeam On Light Fuel Gage
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on

page 207 for more information.
United States Canada
Tow/Haul Mode Light
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you
This light is displayed about how much fuel you have left in your tank.
when the Tow/Haul The gage will first indicate empty before you
mode has been are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as
activated. soon as possible.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on on page 270 for more information.
page 422 and Tow/Haul Mode on page 149.

259
Here are some situations you may experience with This light and a chime will come on when the fuel
your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem tank is low on fuel. There will also be a “FUEL
with the fuel gage. LEVEL LOW” message on the Driver Information
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off Center, see DIC Warnings and Messages on
before the gage reads full. page 270 for more information. When you add fuel
this light and message should go off. If it does
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than not, have your vehicle serviced.
the fuel gage indicated. For example, the
gage may have indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than Driver Information Center (DIC)
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It
off the ignition. also displays warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
Low Fuel Warning Light
All messages will appear in the DIC display
This light, under the fuel located below the tachometer in the instrument
gage, will come on panel cluster.
briefly when you The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
are starting the engine. short delay, the DIC will display the information
that was last displayed before the engine was
turned off.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later
in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons) on page 280 for the displays
available.
260
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see DIC Buttons
“DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons)” later in this section for the displays The buttons are the
available. trip/fuel, vehicle
information,
DIC Operation and Displays (With customization, and
set/reset buttons. The
DIC Buttons) button functions
are detailed in the
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information
following pages.
below explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
information, and warning messages if a system odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average
problem is detected. economy, fuel used, timer, and transmission
The DIC also allows some features to be temperature. Some vehicles also display
customized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With instantaneous economy and an Active Fuel
DIC Buttons) on page 280 for more information. Management™ indicator.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use
the trip odometer reset stem to view some of
the DIC displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)” later in this section.

261
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to To switch between English and metric
display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for measurements, see “Units” later in this section.
vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Trip Odometer
system, engine hours, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system programming for vehicles with a TPM Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
system, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) display shows the current distance traveled in
transmitter programming. either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last
reset for the trip odometer. Pressing the trip
U (Customization): Press this button to odometer reset stem will also display the trip
customize the feature settings on your vehicle. See odometer.
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing
page 280 for more information.
the set/reset button while the trip odometer is
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset displayed. You can also reset the trip odometer
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge while it is displayed by pressing and holding
messages on the DIC. the trip odometer reset stem.
The trip odometer has a feature called the
Trip/Fuel Menu Items retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll odometer to the number of miles (kilometers)
through the following menu items: driven since the ignition was last turned on. This
can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the
Odometer beginning of the trip.
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also display the odometer.

262
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
hold the set/reset button for at least four seconds. the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving
The trip odometer will display the number of history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since the tank. This estimate will change if driving
ignition was last turned on and the vehicle conditions change. For example, if driving in traffic
was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the and making frequent stops, this display may
trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a
example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km) freeway, the number may change even though
before it is started again, and then the retro-active the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is
reset feature is activated, the display will show because different driving conditions produce
5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), driving produces better fuel economy than city
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after Average Economy
the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,
the display will show the number of miles (mi) Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last displays. This display shows the approximate
ignition cycle. average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is
Fuel Range calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE recorded since the last time this menu item was
displays. This display shows the approximate reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and
number of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) hold the set/reset button.
the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The
display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.

263
Fuel Used Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP
displays. This display shows the number of displays. This display shows the temperature of the
gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
information, press and hold the set/reset button Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel
while FUEL USED is displayed. Management™ Indicator
Timer If your vehicle has this display, press the trip/fuel
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. button until INST ECONOMY V8 MODE displays.
This display can be used as a timer. This display shows the current fuel economy at a
particular moment and will change frequently as
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while driving conditions change. This display shows
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the the instantaneous fuel economy in miles per
amount of time that has passed since the timer was gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
last reset, not including time the ignition is off. (L/100 km). Unlike average economy, this
Time will continue to be counted as long as the screen cannot be reset.
ignition is on, even if another display is being shown An Active Fuel Management™ indicator will
on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours, display on the right side of the DIC, while
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which INST ECONOMY displays on the left side. Active
the display will return to zero. Fuel Management™ allows the engine to operate
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly on either four or eight cylinders, depending on your
while TIMER is displayed. driving demands. When Active Fuel Management™
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the is active, V4 MODE will display on the DIC. When
set/reset button while TIMER is displayed. Active Fuel Management™ is inactive, V8 MODE
will display. See Active Fuel Management™ on
page 145 for more information.

264
Blank Display Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset
This display shows no information.
itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
Vehicle Information Menu Items display accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to reset accurately until the next oil change. To
scroll through the following menu items: reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 462.
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE Units
REMAINING displays. This display shows an Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see displays. This display allows you to select between
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that English or Metric units of measurement. Once in
means 99% of the current oil life remains. The this display, press the set/reset button to select
engine oil life system will alert you to change your between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the
oil on a schedule consistent with your driving vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit
conditions. of measurement selected.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE Tire Pressure
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
system, the pressure for each tire can be viewed in
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270. You
the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either
should change your oil as soon as you can. See
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Engine Oil on page 459. In addition to the engine oil
Press the vehicle information button until the DIC
life system monitoring the oil life, additional
displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information button
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa)
Maintenance on page 579 for more information.
LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
265
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected Relearn Remote Key
by the system while driving, a message advising
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
you to check the pressure in a specific tire
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To
will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire
match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the
Pressure on page 515 and DIC Warnings
following:
and Messages on page 270 for more information.
1. Press the vehicle information button until
If the tire pressure display shows dashes
instead of a value, there may be a problem with PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY
your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see displays.
your dealer for service. 2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
Engine Hours
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE on the first transmitter at the same time for
HOURS displays. This display shows the total about 15 seconds.
number of hours the engine has run.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
Relearn Tire Positions transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) the second will match driver 2.
system, after rotating the tires or after replacing A chime will sound indicating that the
a tire or sensor, the system must re-learn the tire transmitter is matched.
positions. To re-learn the tire positions, see 4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516. See repeat Step 3.
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 and DIC
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more
transmitters matched to it.
information.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must
cycle the key to LOCK.

266
Blank Display If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the
trip odometer reset stem to view the following
This display shows no information.
displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer,
and display language.
DIC Operation and Displays
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
(Without DIC Buttons)
Odometer
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the Press the trip odometer reset stem until
information below explains the operation of ODOMETER displays. This display shows the
this system. distance the vehicle has been driven in either
The DIC has different displays which can be miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem
located on the instrument panel cluster. Pressing Engine Hours
the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off, To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition
or acknowledge, DIC messages. in LOCK or ACCESSORY, then press and hold
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
information, and warning messages if a system viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows
problem is detected. the total number of hours the engine has run.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you
can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the
following displays: odometer, engine hours,
trip odometer, oil life, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system programming for vehicles with a TPM
system, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming, and display language.

267
Trip Odometer For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
displays. This display shows the current distance retro-active reset feature is activated, the display
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins
the last reset for the trip odometer. moving, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles
(8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing
and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the If the retro-active reset feature is activated after
trip odometer is displayed. the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,
The trip odometer has a feature called the the display will show the number of miles (mi)
retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last
odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven ignition cycle.
since the ignition was last turned on. This can be Oil Life
used if the trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip. To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem until
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display
hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful
four seconds. The trip odometer will display the life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven display, that means 99% of the current oil life
since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to
was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the change your oil on a schedule consistent with
trip odometer will accumulate mileage. your driving conditions.

268
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE Relearn Tire Positions
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
the display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
PARK (P). If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure
under DIC Warnings and Messages on
Monitor (TPM) system, after rotating the tires or
page 270. You should change your oil as soon as
after replacing a tire or sensor, the system
you can. See Engine Oil on page 459. In
must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire
addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on
the oil life, additional maintenance is
page 516. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
on page 521 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 270 for more information.
page 579 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display Relearn Remote Key
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset To access this display, the vehicle must be in
itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE PARK (P). This display allows you to match
display accidentally at any time other than Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to your
reset accurately until the next oil change. To vehicle, do the following:
reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
Life System on page 462.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem
for three seconds.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE will display.

269
 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons 3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer
on the first transmitter at the same time for reset stem to scroll through all of the available
about 15 seconds. languages.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first The available languages are ENGLISH
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and (default), FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL
the second will match driver 2. (Spanish), and NO CHANGE.
A chime will sound indicating that the 4. Once the desired language is displayed,
transmitter is matched. release the trip odometer reset stem to
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, set your choice.
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight DIC Warnings and Messages
transmitters matched to it. Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
5. To exit the programming mode, you must driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
cycle the key to LOCK. and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. Multiple messages may
Language appear one after another.
This display allows you to select the language in Some messages may not require immediate
which the DIC messages will appear. To select action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons
a language, do the following: on the instrument panel or the trip odometer
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until reset stem on the instrument panel cluster
ODOMETER displays. to acknowledge that you received the messages
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and to clear them from the display.
and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds until the currently set language
displays.

270
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
cleared. You should take any messages that system, this message displays when the
appear on the display seriously and remember that pressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires need
clearing the messages will only make the to be checked. This message also displays
messages disappear, not correct the problem. LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or
RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to
The following are the possible messages that can be checked. You can receive more than one tire
be displayed and some information about them. pressure message at a time. To read the other
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or the trip
This message displays when the engine oil needs odometer reset stem. If a tire pressure message
to be changed. When you change the engine appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
SOON message. See Engine Oil Life System shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
on page 462 for information on how to reset the See Tires on page 507, Loading Your Vehicle on
message. This message clears itself after page 407, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
10 seconds until the next ignition cycle or until the page 515. The DIC display also shows the tire
message is reset. See Engine Oil on page 459 pressure values for the front and rear tires
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 for more by pressing the vehicle information button. See
information. “DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”
earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is
low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 253.

271
DRIVER DOOR OPEN ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
This message displays and a chime sounds if the If your vehicle has an oil level sensor, this
driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle message displays if the oil level in the vehicle is
is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, low. Check the oil level and correct it as
check the door for obstructions, and close the door necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool
again. Check to see if the message still appears or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure
on the DIC. this message clears.
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) This message clears itself after 10 seconds, until
the next ignition cycle. See Engine Oil on
TURNED OFF page 459 for additional information.
This message displays when the engine coolant ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
Gage on page 252. To avoid added strain on a hot engine is overheating, severe engine damage
engine, the air conditioning compressor may occur. If an overheat warning appears on
automatically turns off. When the coolant the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine
compressor turns back on. You can continue to Overheating on page 473 for more information.
drive your vehicle. This message displays when the engine coolant
If this message continues to appear, have the temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
system repaired by your dealer as soon as to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
possible to avoid damage to the engine. Temperature Gage on page 252.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 476 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.

272
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE This message also displays when the vehicle’s
engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If
engine is overheating, severe engine damage this message is on, but there is no reduction in
may occur. If an overheat warning appears on performance, proceed to your destination. The
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop performance may be reduced the next time the
the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
Overheating on page 473 for more information. reduced speed while this message is on, but
This message displays and a chime sounds if the acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
engine cooling system reaches unsafe this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid FUEL LEVEL LOW
severe damage. This message clears when the
engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature. This message displays and a chime sounds if the
fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED See Fuel Gage on page 259 and Fuel on page 446
This message displays and a chime sounds when for more information.
the cooling system temperature gets too hot HOOD OPEN
and the engine further enters the engine coolant
protection mode. See Engine Overheating on This message displays and a chime sounds if the
page 473 for further information. hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close
the hood again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.

273
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays and a chime sounds if the If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and Assist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been
the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the started, this message displays to remind the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and driver that the URPA system has been turned off.
close the door again. Check to see if the message Press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
still appears on the DIC. reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while Assist (URPA) on page 222.
the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver Information This message displays and a chime sounds if the
Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
Engine Oil on page 459 for more information. the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
This message displays if low oil pressure
levels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely REAR ACCESS OPEN
possible and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check This message displays and a chime sounds if the
the oil as soon as possible and have your liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine Oil on in RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate
page 459. and liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display.

274
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message displays while you are matching a This message displays if a problem occurs with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears,
your vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.
Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
System Operation on page 115 and DIC Operation the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or
and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 261 or appears again when you begin driving, the
DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) four-wheel-drive system needs service. See your
on page 267 for more information. dealer.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if a Remote Keyless This message displays if there is a problem with the
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery airbag system. Have your dealer inspect the system
needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on
“Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless page 245 and Airbag System on page 90 for more
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 115. information.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed
and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC.

275
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SERVICE BRAKES SOON
SYSTEM This message displays if there is a problem with
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is the brake system. If this message appears, stop as
a problem with the battery charging system. Under soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart
certain conditions, the charging system light may the vehicle and check for the message on the
also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See DIC display. If the message is still displayed
Charging System Light on page 248. Driving with or appears again when you begin driving, the
this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all brake system needs service. See your dealer.
unnecessary accessories. Have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible. See your SERVICE PARK ASSIST
dealer. If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, this message displays
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM if there is a problem with the URPA system. Do
This message displays along with the brake not use this system to help you park. See
system warning light if there is a problem with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
brake system. See Brake System Warning page 222 for more information. See your dealer
Light on page 249. If this message appears, stop for service.
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer.

276
SERVICE STABILITRAK SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
®
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
displays, it means there may be a problem (TPM) system, this message displays if a part on
with the StabiliTrak® system. If you see this the system is not working properly. If you drive
message, try to reset the system. Stop; turn off your vehicle while any of the four sensors
the engine for at least 15 seconds; then start are missing or inoperable, the warning comes on
the engine again. If this message still comes on, it in about 20 minutes. A sensor would be missing,
means there is a problem. You should see your for example, if you put different wheels on
dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, your vehicle without transferring the sensors. If the
however, you do not have the benefit of warning comes on and stays on, there may be
StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive a problem with the TPM. See your dealer.
accordingly.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
®
If your vehicle has the Autoride suspension displays when there is a problem with the Traction
system, this message displays when the Autoride® Control System (TCS). When this message
suspension system is not operating properly. displays, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer
for service. See StabiliTrak® System on page 363
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or
may not restart so you may want to take the
vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.
See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 137 for
more information.

277
STABILITRAK OFF • The message could display if the stability
® system takes longer than usual to complete its
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak , this message diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
displays when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when
the stability control has been automatically • The message displays if an engine or vehicle
disabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the full related problem has been detected and the
benefits of the stability enhancement system, you vehicle needs service. See your dealer.
should normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However, • The message also displays if the vehicle is
you should turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets shifted into 4LO.
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want
to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you The message turns off as soon as the conditions
are driving in extreme off-road conditions and that caused the message to be displayed are
require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is no longer present.
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 404. To TIGHTEN GAS CAP
turn the StabiliTrak® system on or off, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 363. This message may display along with the check
engine light on the instrument panel cluster if
There are several conditions that can cause this the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. See
message to appear. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 253.
• One condition is overheating, which could Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank on
occur if StabiliTrak® activates continuously page 451. The diagnostic system can determine
for an extended period of time. if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
• The message also displays if the brake installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to
system warning light is on. See Brake System evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving
Warning Light on page 249. trips with the cap properly installed should turn this
light and message off.

278
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Notice: If you drive your vehicle while
system, this message displays when the system the transmission fluid is overheating and the
is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. transmission temperature warning is displayed
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC,
Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation and you can damage the transmission. This could
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 267 for lead to costly repairs that would not be
more information. The tire positions must be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing vehicle with overheated transmission fluid
a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and or while the transmission temperature warning
Rotation on page 521, Tire Pressure Monitor is displayed.
System on page 516, and Inflation - Tire Pressure
This message displays along with a continuous
on page 515 for more information.
chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle
TRACTION CONTROL OFF gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid
temperature high can cause damage to the
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the
displays when the Traction Control System (TCS) transmission to cool. This message clears and
is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. the chime stops when the fluid temperature
See StabiliTrak® System on page 363 for more reaches a safe level.
information.

279
TURN SIGNAL ON All of the customization options may not be
available on your vehicle. Only the options
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn available will be displayed on your DIC.
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the
turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position. The default settings for the customization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID may have been changed from their default
state since then.
This message displays when the windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid The customization preferences are automatically
reservoir as soon as possible. See Engine recalled.
Compartment Overview on page 458 for the To change customization preferences, use the
location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. following procedure.
Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 485
for more information. Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
DIC Vehicle Customization PARK (P).
(With DIC Buttons) To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities turned off.
that allow you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization features can 2. Press the customization button to scroll
only be programmed to one setting on the through the available customizable options.
vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred
setting for two different drivers.

280
Feature Settings Menu Items FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
The following are customization features that allow ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
you to program settings to the vehicle: NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH feature. The current setting will remain.
This feature will only display if a language other Choose one of the available settings and press the
than English has been set. This feature allows you set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
to change the language in which the DIC select it.
messages appear to English. You can also change the language by pressing
Press the customization button until the the trip odometer reset stem. See “Language”
PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset Buttons) earlier in this section for more information.
button once to display all DIC messages in English. AUTO DOOR LOCK
DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
This feature allows you to select the language in Automatic Door Locks on page 123 for more
which the DIC messages will appear. information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
Press the set/reset button once to access the set/reset button once to access the settings for this
settings for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the customization button to
customization button to scroll through the following scroll through the following settings:
settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
English. PARK (P).
281
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
automatically lock when the vehicle speed is unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
feature. The current setting will remain. PARK (P).
Choose one of the available settings and press ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC when the key is taken out of the ignition.
to select it.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It
feature. The current setting will remain.
also allows you to select which doors and
when the doors will automatically unlock. See Choose one of the available settings and press
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 123 the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
for more information. to select it.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

282
REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on
This feature allows you to select the type of
the RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when
feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle
the lock button is pressed again within five
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
seconds of the previous command.
You will not receive feedback when locking
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) feature. The current setting will remain.
System Operation on page 115 for more
information. Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
Press the customization button until REMOTE to select it.
DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
for this feature. Then press the customization This feature allows you to select the type of
button to scroll through the following settings: feedback you will receive when unlocking the
vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press
transmitter. You will not receive feedback when
the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry
when you press the lock button on the RKE (RKE) System Operation on page 115 for more
transmitter. information.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

283
Press the customization button until REMOTE DELAY DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. This feature allows you to select whether or not the
Press the set/reset button once to access locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be
the settings for this feature. Then press the delayed. When locking the doors and liftgate with
customization button to scroll through the following the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless
settings: Entry (RKE) transmitter and a door or the liftgate is
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash open, this feature will delay locking the doors and
when you press the unlock button on the liftgate until five seconds after the last door is
RKE transmitter. closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use. The key must be
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will out of the ignition for this feature to work. You can
flash when you press the unlock button on temporarily override delayed locking by pressing
the RKE transmitter. the power door lock switch or the RKE transmitter a
second time. See Delayed Locking on page 123 for
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this more information.
feature. The current setting will remain.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
Choose one of the available settings and press LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC set/reset button once to access the settings for this
to select it. feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is
closed.

284
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain. feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
to select it. DIC to select it.
EXIT LIGHTING APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of This feature allows you to select whether or not to
time you want the exterior lamps to remain have the exterior lights turn on briefly during
on when it is dark enough outside. This happens low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using
after the key is turned from RUN to LOCK. the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press
set/reset button once to access the settings for the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button this feature. Then press the customization
to scroll through the following settings: button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds. ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the
exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.

285
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, feature. The current setting will remain.
or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Choose one of the available settings and press the
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on set/reset button while it is displayed on the
page 115 for more information. DIC to select it.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this PARK TILT MIRRORS
feature. The current setting will remain. If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
Choose one of the available settings and press select whether or not the outside mirror(s) will
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted
to select it. into REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View Assist
Mirrors on page 172 for more information.
CHIME VOLUME
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
This feature allows you to select the volume level MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
of the chime. set/reset button once to access the settings for this
Press the customization button until CHIME feature. Then press the customization button to
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the scroll through the following settings:
set/reset button once to access the settings for this OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted
feature. Then press the customization button to down when the vehicle is shifted into
scroll through the following settings: REVERSE (R).
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will
to a normal level. be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud
level.

286
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted is removed from the ignition.
into REVERSE (R).
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s occur one time after the key is removed from the
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle ignition. If the automatic movement has already
is shifted into REVERSE (R). occurred, and you put the key back in the ignition
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this and remove it again, the seat will stay in the original
feature. The current setting will remain. exit position, unless a memory recall took place
prior to removing the key again.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
select it. feature. The current setting will remain.
EASY EXIT SEAT Choose one of the available settings and press
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
select your preference for the automatic easy exit to select it.
seat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and MEMORY SEAT RECALL
Pedals on page 13 for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT select your preference for the remote memory seat
SEAT appears on the DIC display. Press the recall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
set/reset button once to access the settings for this Pedals on page 13 for more information.
feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will
occur.

287
Press the customization button until MEMORY REMOTE START
SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
the set/reset button once to access the settings
turn the remote start off or on. The remote
for this feature. Then press the customization
start feature allows you to start the engine from
button to scroll through the following settings:
outside of the vehicle using your Remote Keyless
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will Entry (RKE) transmitter. See ″Remote Vehicle
occur. Start″ under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 115 for more information.
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the Press the customization button until REMOTE
stored driving position when the unlock button on START appears on the DIC display. Press
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is the set/reset button once to access the settings for
pressed. On some vehicles with the adjustable this feature. Then press the customization
throttle and brake pedal feature, the pedals button to scroll through the following settings:
will also automatically move. See “Relearn Remote OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation and ON (default): The remote start feature will
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 267 be enabled.
for more information on matching transmitters to NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
driver ID numbers. feature. The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this Choose one of the available settings and press
feature. The current setting will remain. the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.

288
FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the This feature allows you to exit the feature
customization features back to their factory default settings menu.
settings.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO
Press the customization button until FACTORY
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
display. Press the set/reset button once to exit the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
menu.
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings: If you do not exit, pressing the customization
button again will return you to the beginning of the
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization feature settings menu.
features will be set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features
will not be set to their factory default settings. The feature settings menu will be exited when any
of the following occurs:
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC • The vehicle is no longer in RUN.
to select it. • The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is
reached and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.

289
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then {CAUTION:
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features. This system provides you with a far greater
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a access to audio stations and song listings.
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on Giving extended attention to entertainment
page 356. By taking a few moments to read this tasks while driving can cause a crash and
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s you or others can be injured or killed.
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as Always keep your eyes on the road and
well as take advantage of its features. While your your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by in extended searching while driving.
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
your favorite stations using the presets and safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them. help avoid distraction while driving.

290
While your vehicle is parked: Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
• Familiarize yourself with its operation. is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
• Set up your audio system by presetting your (RAP) on page 141 for more information.
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with a
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering Single CD Player)
wheel controls if the vehicle has them. If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD, the
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to radio has a clock button for setting the time
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD and date.
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
radio, make sure that it can be added by
1. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
checking with your dealer/retailer. Also, check
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
federal rules covering mobile radio and
year) displays.
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly. 2. Press the pushbutton located under any one
Added sound equipment can interfere with the of the labels that you want to change. Every
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
other systems, and even damage them. Your or the date if selected, increases by one.
vehicle’s systems can interfere with the • Another way to increase the time or date, is
operation of sound equipment that has been to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD
added. (forward) button.

291
 3. To decrease the time or date, press the left Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with a
SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the tune knob, located on CD and DVD Player)
the upper right side of the radio, to adjust If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD and
the selected setting. DVD player, the radio has a clock button for setting
Changing the Time and Date Default the time and date.
Settings To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
You can change the time default setting from 1. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN,
12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,
setting from month/day/year to day/month/year. and year) displays.
To change the time or date default settings, follow 2. Press the pushbutton located under any one
these instructions: of the labels that you want to change. Every
1. Press the clock button and then the time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
pushbutton located under the forward arrow or the date if selected, increases by one.
that is currently displayed on the radio screen • Another way to increase the time or date, is
until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD
and the date MM/DD (month and day) (forward) button.
and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 3. To decrease the time or date, press the left
2. Press the pushbutton located under the SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button, or
desired option. turn the tune knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio, to adjust the selected
3. Press the clock button again to apply the
setting.
selected default, or let the screen time out.

292
Changing the Time and Date Default Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with a
Settings
Six-Disc CD Player)
You can change the time default setting from
12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD
setting from month/day/year to day/month/year. player, the radio has a MENU button instead of
the clock button to set the time and date.
To change the time or date default settings, follow
these instructions: To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Press the clock button and then the 1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
pushbutton located under the forward arrow option displays, press the pushbutton
that is currently displayed on the radio screen located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM,
until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,
and the date MM/DD (month and day) and year) displays.
and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located under any one
2. Press the pushbutton located under the of the time or date setting labels that you
desired option. want to change. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if
3. Press the clock button again to apply the selected, increases by one.
selected default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD
(forward) button.
3. To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, to adjust
the selected setting.

293
Changing the Time and Date Default Radio with CD (MP3)
Settings
You can change the time default setting from
12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default
setting from month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option displays, press the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is
currently displayed on the radio screen until
the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the
date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD
desired option. similar

3. Press the MENU button again to apply the

selected default, or let the screen time out.

294
Radio Data System (RDS) Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM system on and off.
stations that broadcast RDS information. This
system relies upon receiving specific information Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
from these stations and only works when the increase or decrease the volume.
information is available. While the radio is tuned to Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While
display. In rare cases, a radio station could SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
broadcast incorrect information that causes the to compensate for road and wind noise as driving
radio features to work improperly. If this happens, speed changes. That way, the volume level should
contact the radio station. sound about the same as you drive.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service To activate SCV:
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™ 2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channels setup menu.
including music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather 3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming. VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text 4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
information that includes song title and artist name. Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med
A service fee is required in order to receive the (medium), or High) to select the level of radio
XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™; volume compensation. The display times out
In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher
1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at setting allows for more radio volume
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
(438-9677).

295
Finding a Station 4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, button to display additional text information
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays. related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or
MP3 song. A choice of additional information
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
stations.
(category) might appear. Continue pressing the
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow information button to highlight the desired label, or
to go to the next or to the previous station and press the pushbutton positioned under any one
stay there. of the labels and the information about that
label displays.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The When information is not available, No Info
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, displays.
then goes to the next station. Press either Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
strong signal that are in the selected band. your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, if the
vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on
page 356.

296
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can The number of favorites pages can be setup using
be programmed as favorites using the the MENU button. To setup the number of
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station favorites pages, perform the following steps:
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to setup menu.
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the
Each page of favorites can contain any FAV 1-6 label.
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) 3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform by pressing the pushbutton located below the
the following steps: displayed page numbers.
1. Tune to the desired radio station. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
2. Press the FAV button to display the page out, to return to the original main radio
where you want the station stored. screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons programming your favorites for the chosen
until a beep sounds. Whenever that amount of numbered pages.
pushbutton is pressed and released, the
station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.

297
Setting the Tone EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose
(Bass/Midrange/Treble) bass and treble equalization settings designed for
different types of music. The choices are pop,
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting
Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns
press the tune knob until the tone control labels the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted settings are either MANUAL or TALK.
setting. The highlighted setting can also be Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD
(forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desired BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
weak or if there is static, decrease the treble. control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
positioned under the desired label. Turn the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
can also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,
adjusts to the middle position.
FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the desired levels are obtained.
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.

298
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle 3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle or previous XM™ station within the selected
position. category.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to 4. To exit the category search mode, press the
the middle position, press the tune knob for FAV button or BAND button to display your
more than two seconds until a beep sounds. favorites again.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station Undesired XM™ categories can be removed

through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find category, perform the following:
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™ 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired setup menu.
category, perform the following:
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ CAT label.
frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
to display the category labels on the radio
you want removed.
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
2. Press either of the two buttons below the
along with the word Removed displays.
desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with that 5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
category.

299
Removed categories can be restored by pressing Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category displays or by pressing the Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
pushbutton under the Restore All label. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
Radio Messages LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If To insert one CD, do the following:
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio 1. Press and release the load button.
has not been configured properly and your
vehicle must be returned to your dealer for service. 2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
Locked: This message displays when the label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot 1. Press and hold the load button for
be corrected, contact your dealer. two seconds. A beep sounds and Load
All Discs displays.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only 2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to
See XM Radio Messages on page 335 later in this insert the discs. The CD player takes up to
section for further detail. six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.

300
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the If there is no apparent damage, try a known
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or good CD.
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on or an attempt is made to play scratched or
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the damaged CDs, the CD player could be
track number displays. When more than one CD is damaged. While using the CD player, use only
in the radio, the desired CD to be played can be CDs in good condition without any label,
changed by pressing the pushbuttons located load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
under the displayed Disc label. and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) liquids, and debris.
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
manner. personal computer and a description label is
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of with a marking pen.
recording, the quality of the music that has been If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been this section.
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 353 for more information.

301
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing, to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is
press and release this button. A beep sounds and heard at a reduced volume. Release this
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If elapsed time of the track displays.
the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player and \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
begins playing. button to advance playback quickly within a track.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the this button to resume playing the track. The
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs. elapsed time of the track displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the RDM (Random): With the random setting, the
CD that is currently playing. tracks can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
go to the start of the current track, if more than the following:
ten seconds on the CD have played. Press
the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If • Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple player, insert a disc partway into the slot of
times, the player continues moving backward or the CD player. A RDM label displays.
forward through the tracks on the CD. To play the tracks from the single CD in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to
turn off random play.

302
 • Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
player, press and hold the LOAD button. A
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. If you have a radio with a single CD (MP3)
Insert one or more discs partway into the slot or a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable of
of the CD player. playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM CD Messages
label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press
the same pushbutton again to turn off CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or
random play. the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
normal, the CD should play.
radio for future listening.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing the disc and/or track
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
number displays when a CD is in the player. Press upside down.
this button again and the system automatically • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a and try again.
portable audio player. If a portable audio player • There could have been a problem while burning
is not connected, No Input Device Found displays. the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.

303
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
reason, try a known good CD. (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot input jack. When a device is connected, press the
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio
displays an error message, write it down from the device over the vehicle speakers.
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
problem. counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might be needed from the portable
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack device if the volume does not go loud or soft
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. enough.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
However, an external audio device such as when a portable audio device is playing. The
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player, portable audio device continues playing, so you
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected might want to stop it or turn it off.
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
for audio listening.
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary Press this button again and the system begins
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See playing audio from the connected portable audio
Defensive Driving on page 356 for more player. If a portable audio player is not
information on driver distraction. connected, No Input Device Found displays.

304
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) Dolby® is manufactured under license from
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the radio
is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear
Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for
more information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio
faceplate. The player is capable of reading the
DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video
media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).

305
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. to compensate for road and wind noise as
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast driving speed changes. That way, the volume level
channels including music, news, sports, talk, should sound about the same as you drive. To
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s activate SCV:
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
and artist name. A service fee is required in 2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
order to receive the XM™ service. For more setup menu.
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at 3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696) VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677). 4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV
setting (OFF, Low, Med (medium), or High) to
Playing the Radio select the level of radio volume compensation.
The display times out after approximately
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the 10 seconds. Each higher setting allows
system on and off. for more radio volume compensation at faster
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to vehicle speeds.
increase or decrease the volume.

306
Finding a Station 4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, button to display additional text information related
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3
the selection. song. A choice of additional information such as:
Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) could
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations. appear. Continue pressing the information button to
© SEEK ¨: Press the left or right SEEK highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station positioned under any one of the labels and the
and stay there. information about that label is displayed.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK When information is not available, No Info displays.
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning. favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has them.
strong signal that are in the selected band. See Defensive Driving on page 356.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.

307
Each page of favorites can contain any 4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) out, to return to the original main radio
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform screen showing the radio station frequency
the following steps: labels and to begin the process of
1. Tune to the desired radio station. programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored. Setting the Tone
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
until a beep sounds. Whenever that BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
pushbutton is pressed and released, the adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune
station that was set, returns. knob until the tone control labels display. Continue
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the
station you want stored as a favorite. pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn
the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
adjust the highlighted setting. If a station’s
the MENU button. To setup the number of
frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
treble.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
setup menu.
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
2. Press the pushbutton located below the under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
FAV 1-6 label. two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages to the middle position.
by pressing the pushbutton located below the To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
displayed page numbers. the middle position, press the tune knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.

308
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to the
bass and treble equalization settings designed for middle position at one time, press the tune
different types of music. The choices are pop, knob for more than two seconds until a beep
rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting sounds.
MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ
settings are either MANUAL or TALK. CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance category, perform the following:
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker 1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
control labels display. Press the pushbutton frequency displays. Press the CAT button to
positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune display the category labels on the radio
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust display. Continue pressing the CAT button
the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can until the desired category name is displayed.
also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, Another way to navigate the category list
FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until the is to press the REV button or the FWD button.
desired levels are obtained.
2. Press either of the two buttons below
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle the desired category label to immediately tune
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the to the first XM™ station associated with
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. that category.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.

309
 3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the the pushbutton under the Add label when a
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next removed category displays or by pressing the
or previous XM™ station within the selected pushbutton under the Restore All label.
category. Categories cannot be removed or added while the
4. To exit the category search mode, press the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again. Radio Messages
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed Calibration Error: The audio system has been
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
category, perform the following: Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio has not been configured properly for your
setup menu. vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer for
service.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
CAT label. Locked: This message displays when the
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
you want removed. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
Remove label until the category name be corrected, contact your dealer.
along with the word Removed displays. Radio Messages for XM™ Only
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
See XM Radio Messages on page 335 later in this
section for further detail.

310
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
or CD Slot) reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
playing (loading a disc into the system, depending difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
on media type and format ranges from and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
for a DVD to begin playing). is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing and DVDs on page 353 for more information.
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio If there is no apparent damage, try a known
source. The CD is controlled by the buttons good CD.
on the radio faceplate. The DVD/CD decks, (upper
slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
CD deck) of the radio are compatible with most than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s. or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD damaged. While using the CD player, use only
symbol appears on the left side of the radio CDs in good condition without any label,
display. As each new track starts to play, the track load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
number appears on the display. and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) liquids, and debris.
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.

311
Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVD
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing
personal computer and a description label is in the top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
with a marking pen. Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
this section. automatically pulls back into the player.

Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD eject If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
button to eject the CD that is currently playing
disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject
in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting
button for more than five seconds to force the disc
Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
to eject.
Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the
CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
automatically pulls back into the player. CD that is currently playing.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject the start of the current track, if more than
button for more than five seconds to force the disc five seconds on the CD have played. If less than
to eject. five seconds on the CD have played, the
previous track plays. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is
held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.

312
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
heard at a reduced volume. Release this to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The message showing the track or chapter number
elapsed time of the track displays. displays when a disc is in either slot. Press
this button again and the system automatically
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
button to advance playback quickly within a track. portable audio player. If a portable audio player
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
this button to resume playing the track. The If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD
elapsed time of the track displays. slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input
RDM (Random): With random, tracks can be Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,
listened to in random, rather than sequential order. the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
To play the tracks from the CD, press the available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
DVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDM See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
label displays. Press the pushbutton positioned section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
under the RDM label until Random Current Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn more information.
off random play.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio seat operator can turn on the video screen
when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or and use the remote control to navigate the CD
DVD remains inside the radio for future listening (tracks only) through the remote control.
or for viewing entertainment.

313
Audio Output Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
Only one audio source can be heard through the CD-RW Disc
speakers at one time. An audio source is A radio with CD and DVD has the capability of
defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM, playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For
Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack. more information on how to play an MP3/WMA
Press the power button to turn the radio on. The CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in
radio can be heard through all of the vehicle the index.
speakers.
CD Messages
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,
FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the If these messages displays and/or the CD comes
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available). Optical Error: The disc was inserted
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s upside down.
front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an
the front seat passengers are able to listen to
invalid or unknown format.
playback from this source through the vehicle
speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) EJECT problems.
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment System on
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
page 337 for more information.
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.

314
 • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
and try again. audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,
• There could have been a problem while burning DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along
with MP3 and WMA formats.
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player. If an error message appears on the video screen
or the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other under, Rear Seat Entertainment System on
reason, try a known good CD. page 337 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot section for more information.
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio Playing a DVD
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer when reporting the DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
problem. cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
Using the DVD Player showing track or chapter number displays when a
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the
the remote control or by the buttons on the radio system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under Rear device, such as a portable audio player. If a
Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux
information. Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD
slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of between the two sources and not indicate “No Aux
the appropriate region code that is printed on Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
the jacket of most DVDs. connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through
all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).

315
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this © SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear button to return to the start of the current track
Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more or chapter. Press this button again to go to
information. the previous track or chapter. This button might
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on or not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
off. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to information or the previews.
increase or decrease the volume. Press and hold SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press this
the knob for more than two seconds to turn off the button to go to the next track or chapter. This
entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) button might not work when the DVD is playing the
system and to start the parental control feature. copyright information or the previews.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant
from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system s REV (Reverse): Press this button to quickly
or remote control. reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal
A lock symbol appears next to the clock display. speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while in
The parental control feature remains on until this fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press this
button is pressed and held for more than button again. This button might not work when the
two seconds again, or until the driver turns the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
ignition off and exits the vehicle. previews.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on a CD \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button to
or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to fast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays the
change clock or date settings, while in the clock or elapsed time and fast forwards five times the
date setting mode. See the information given earlier normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press this
in this section specific to the radio, CD, and the button again. This button might not work when
DVD. Also, see “Setting the Time” in the index, for the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
setting the clock and date. previews.

316
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
DVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, pause icon displays on the radio system, to toggle
the player automatically pulls it back in after between pausing or restarting playback of a
15 seconds. DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display,
the system is in pause mode. If the pause
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
icon is showing on display, the system is in
completed, because of an unknown format, etc., playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press the
and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the
play button to turn the screen on.
CD eject button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject. Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there might be a delay of up
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons to 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu the movie automatically, press the pushbutton
shows several tag options for DVD playing. located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed
Press the pushbuttons located under any desired on the radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer
tag option during DVD playback. See the tag to the on-screen instructions, if available.
options listed below for more information.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat r (Enter): Press this button to select the
Entertainment System on page 337 for more choices that are highlighted in any menu.
information. The Video Screen automatically turns
on when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.

317
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD The Video Screen does not automatically power
menu. The DVD menu is different on every on when the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It
DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the must be manually turned on by the rear seat
navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through occupant through the remote control power button.
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the
enter button. This button only operates when r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
using a DVD. pause icon displays on the radio system, to toggle
between pausing or restarting playback of a
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display,
directional arrows for navigating through the the system is in pause mode. If the pause
menus. icon is showing on display, the system is in
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current playback mode.
active menu and return to the previous menu. q Group r: Press this button to cycle through
This button operates only when a DVD is playing musical groupings on the DVD-A disc.
and a menu is active.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display
directional arrows for navigating through the
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu menus.
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press
the pushbuttons located under any desired tag e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cycle
option during DVD playback. See the tag options through audio stream formats located on the
listed below for more information. DVD-A disc. There is not any type of notification
for the customer to see through the radio
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A
display, but VSM has a text field that shows audio
menus and controls through the remote control.
stream changing.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
Entertainment System on page 337 for more
information.
318
Inserting a Disc To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause
button on the remote control, or press the
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player
tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume
might not accept some paper labeled media. The
play from where it last stopped if the disc has not
player starts loading the disc into the system
been ejected and the stop button has not been
and show “Loading Disc” on the radio display. At
pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
the same time, the radio displays a softkey
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed
menu of option(s). Some discs automatically play
twice on the remote control, the disc resumes
the movie while others default to the softkey
playing at the beginning of the disc.
menu display, which requires the Play, Enter, or
Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by Ejecting a Disc
softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the
remote control.
disc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, but
Loading a disc into the system, depending not removed, the radio reloads the disc after a
on media type and format, ranges from short period of time. The disc is stored in the radio.
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds The radio does not resume play of the disc
for a DVD. automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the
Stopping and Resuming Playback DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD
player begins to play again. In case loading and
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed
system, press the stop button on the remote (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject,
control, or press the pushbutton located under the press and hold the DVD Eject button more
stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to
something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD
AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.

319
DVD Radio Error Messages Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Player Error: This message displays when there Defensive Driving on page 356 for more
are disc load or eject problems. information on driver distraction.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the To use a portable audio player, connect a 1/8 inch
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side (3.5 mm) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
up, or if the disc is damaged. input jack. While a device is connected, the radio
automatically begins playing audio from the
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the device over the vehicle speakers.
disc is not from a correct region.
To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no input over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Aux
disc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUX button on the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”
button is pressed on the radio. displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screen
must be on in order for the radio to source to rear
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s) auxiliary.
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
This is not an audio output; do not plug the counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. volume of the portable player. Additional volume
However, an external audio device such as adjustments might be needed from the portable
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player, device if the volume is not loud or soft enough.
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source when a portable audio device is playing. The
for audio listening. portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or power it off.

320
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message Six-Disc CD Player)
showing track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded
device, such as a portable audio player. If a on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
between the two sources and not indicate “No Aux 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through are available for display by the radio when
all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this Compressed Audio
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear The radio also plays discs that contain both
Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
information. MP3/WMA files. By default the radio shows the
MP3/WMA label on the left side of the screen but
plays both file formats in the order in which
they were recorded to the disc.

321
MP3/WMA Format • Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
personal computer: combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded unable to play up to the maximum number of
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA to play a large number of files, folders, playlists
files on one disc. or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
• The CD player is able to read and play a folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display, potentially
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and
getting cut off.
a combined total of 512 folders and files.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
Trying to add music to an existing disc might
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
cause the disc not to function in the player.
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs Playlists can be changed by using the previous
or less. and next folder buttons, the tuner knob, or
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to the seek buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total that was recorded can also be played using no
number of folders to a minimum in order to file folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to more than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists,
locate a particular folder during playback. and a combined total of 512 folders and files,
the player lets you access and navigate up to the
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl maximum, but all items over the maximum are
extension (other file extensions might not accessible.
not work).

322
Root Directory No Folder
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only
treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed files, the files are located under the
compressed audio files, the directory is displayed root folder. The next and previous folder function
as the CD label. All files contained directly does not display on a CD-R or CD-RW that
under the root directory are accessed prior to any was recorded without folders or playlists.
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists
are always accessed before root folders or files. and compressed audio files, but no folders, all
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD files are located under the root folder. The folder
audio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder under down and the folder up buttons search playlists
the root directory called CD accesses all of (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
the CD audio tracks on the disc.
Order of Play
Empty Directory or Folder Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere played in the following order:
in the file structure that contains only • Play begins from the first track in the first
folders/subfolders and no compressed files playlist and continues sequentially through
directly beneath them, the player advances to all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
the next folder in the file structure that contains of the last playlist has played, play continues
compressed audio files. The empty folder does from the first track of the first playlist.
not display.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.

323
When play enters a new folder, the display does Playing an MP3/WMA
not automatically show the new folder name unless Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot
you have chosen the folder mode as the default (Single CD Player), or press the load button and
display. The new track name displays. wait for the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD
File System and Naming Player), label side up. The player pulls it in, and the
CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
The song name that displays is the song name that
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the
the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as
CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it was the
the track name.
last selected audio source.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four As each new track starts to play, the track number
pages are shortened. Parts of words on the and song title displays.
last page of text and the extension of the filename
does not display. If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound quality can
be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the
Preprogrammed Playlists method of recording, the quality of the music that
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using has been recorded, and the way the CD-R or
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ CD-RW has been handled. There can be an
software can be accessed, however, they cannot increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,
be edited using the radio. These playlists are and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these
treated as special folders containing compressed problems occur, check the bottom surface of the
audio song files. CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see
Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 353 for more
information.

324
If there is no apparent damage, try a known If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after
good CD. several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than automatically pulls back into the player and
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an begins playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged and hold the eject button for two seconds to
CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While eject all discs.
using the CD player, use only CDs in good f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA
condition without any label, load one CD at a files on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and © SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
debris. the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in than ten seconds have played. Press the
the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
computer and a description label is needed, try If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple
labeling the top of the recorded CD with a times, the player continues moving backward
marking pen. or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
this section. positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
CD-RW that is currently playing, press and release positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc track in the next folder.
displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed.

325
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press
this button to resume playing the file. The the pushbutton located below the music navigator
elapsed time of the file displays. label. The player scans the disc to sort the files
by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this might take several minutes to scan the disc
button to advance playback quickly within an depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can
volume. Release this button to resume playing the begin playing while it is scanning the disc in
file. The elapsed time of the file displays. the background. When the scan is finished, the
RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
listened to in random, rather than sequential order, playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The
on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-disc current artist playing is shown on the second line
CD player. To use random, do one of the following: of the display between the arrows. Once all
1. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or songs by that artist are played, the player moves
CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton to the next artist in alphabetical order on the
positioned under the RDM label until Random CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA
Current Disc displays. Press the same files by that artist. To listen to MP3/WMA files
pushbutton again to turn off random play. by another artist, press the pushbutton located
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc below either arrow button. The CD goes to
CD player in random order, press the the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label Continue pressing either button until the desired
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the artist is displayed.
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.

326
To change from playback by artist to playback by Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the DVD Player)
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
main music navigator screen. Now the album name Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
displays on the second line between the arrows and The radio also plays discs that contain both
songs from the current album begins to play. Once uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
all songs from that album are played, the player MP3/WMA files depending on which slot the disc
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on is loaded into. By default the radio reads only
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores the
files from that album. MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton deck, pressing the CAT button toggles between
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA compressed and uncompressed audio format, the
playback. default being the uncompressed format (.CDA).
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when MP3/WMA Format
a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
future listening. personal computer:
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play • Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this • Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA
button again and the system automatically files on one disc.
searches for an auxiliary input device such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

327
 • The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and • Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
play a maximum combination of 512 files and names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
folders. The DVD player (upper slot) is combination of a large number of files and
able to read 255 folders, 15 playlists and folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
40 sessions. unable to play up to the maximum number of
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to find songs while driving. Organize songs to play a large number of files, folders, playlists,
by albums using one folder for each album. or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
or less. up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the • Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
total number of folders to a minimum in Trying to add music to an existing disc can
order to reduce the complexity and confusion cause the disc not to function in the player.
in trying to locate a particular folder during Root Directory
playback.
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls treated as a folder. If the root directory has
extension as other file extensions may compressed audio files, the directory is displayed
not work. as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders or files.

328
Empty Directory or Folder Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are
in the file structure that contains only played in the following order:
folders/subfolders and no compressed files • Play begins from the first track in the first
directly beneath them, the player advances to playlist and continues sequentially through
the next folder in the file structure that contains all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
compressed audio files. The empty folder does of the last playlist has played, play continues
not display. from the first track of the first playlist.
No Folder • Play begins from the first track in the first
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only folder and continues sequentially through
compressed files, the files are located under the all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
root folder. The next and previous folder function the last folder has played, play continues
does not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that from the first track of the first folder.
was recorded without folders or playlists. When When play enters a new folder, the display does
displaying the name of the folder the radio not automatically show the new folder name unless
displays ROOT. the folder mode was chosen as the default
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists display. The new track name displays.
and compressed audio files, but no folders, all
files are located under the root folder. The folder
down and the folder up buttons search playlists
(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.

329
File System and Naming Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or
The song name that is displayed is the song name CD Slot)
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio or bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,
displays the file name without the extension and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey
Track names longer than 32 characters or four menu appears and allows navigation of the disc.
pages are shortened. Parts of words on the The menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomize
last page of text and the extension of the filename song play order), a Folder icon with left and
displays. right arrows (to move up or down through available
folders), a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist
Preprogrammed Playlists
available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ Folder softkey only or the menu as previously
software can be accessed, however, they cannot described.
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
treated as special folders containing compressed
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.
audio song files.
When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R
or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.

330
If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound quality Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught
can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
the method of recording, the quality of the personal computer and a description label is
music that has been recorded, and the way the needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can be with a marking pen.
an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If this section.
these problems occur, check the bottom surface of
the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, Z CD (Eject): Press and release the Z CD
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is
does not play properly. If the surface of the CD is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds
soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
page 353 for more information. ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be
If there is no apparent damage, try a known removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
good CD. after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
or an attempt is made to play scratched or completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
damaged CDs, the CD player could be disc fails to eject, press and hold the Z CD
damaged. While using the CD player, use only button for more than five seconds to force the disc
CDs in good condition without any label, to eject.
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.

331
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the Z Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
DVD button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is positioned under the Folder label to go to the
currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds first track in the previous folder.
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or cT (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or track in the next folder.
CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be s REV (Reverse): Press and hold the s REV
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the button to reverse playback quickly within an
MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced
disc fails to eject, press and hold the Z DVD
button for more than five seconds to force the disc volume. Release the s REV button to resume
to eject. playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
f (Tune): Turn the f knob to select MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold
playing. the \ FWD button to advance playback quickly
within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a
© SEEK ¨: Press the left © SEEK arrow to go reduced volume. Release the \ FWD button to
to the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
than five seconds have played. If less than the file displays.
five seconds have played, the previous MP3/WMA
file plays. Press the right ¨ SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3/WMA file. If either the left © or
right ¨ SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward or
forward through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
332
RDM (Random): With the random setting, The radio can begin playing while it is scanning
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be the disc in the background. When the scan is
listened to in random, rather than sequential order. finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing
To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or again.
CD-RW you are listening to in random order,
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
defaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order
label until Random Current Disc displays.
by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the
Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
second line of the display between the arrows. If
random play.
you want to listen to MP3/WMA files by another
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator artist, press the pushbutton located below
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or either arrow button. The disc goes to the next or
CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
the pushbutton located below the music navigator pressing either button until the desired artist
label. The player scans the disc to sort the files is displayed.
by artist and album ID3 tag information. It To change from playback by artist to playback by
might take several minutes to scan the disc album, press the pushbutton located below the
depending on the number of MP3/WMA files Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. the buttons below the album button. Press the
To cancel music navigator while the player is pushbutton below the back label to return to the
scanning, press the pushbutton located below the main music navigator screen. Now the album
music navigator label or eject the disc. name is displayed on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begin
to play. Once all songs from that album are played,
the player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files from that album.

333
To exit music navigator mode, press the If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
pushbutton below the Back label to return to DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
normal MP3/WMA playback. sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio CD AUX button cycles through all available options,
when a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and
remains inside the radio for future listening or Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the
viewing entertainment. Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening Entertainment System on page 337 for more
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message information.
showing track or chapter number displays when a If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the seat operator can turn on the video screen and use
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
device, such as a portable audio player. If a through the remote control.
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device” displays.

334
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels) after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after four second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info Artist Name/Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
available The system is working properly.
No Title Info Song/Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this
available channel. The system is working properly.
No CAT Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this
available channel. The system is working properly.
No Information No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available on this channel. The system is working properly.

335
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
CAT Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.
the chosen category The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message appears after having your vehicle serviced, check
with your dealer.
XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
(should only be if could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
hardware failure)
Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.

336
Navigation/Radio System Before You Drive
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system. The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
The navigation system has built-in features screen while driving and should not try to do so.
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never In severe or extreme weather conditions the
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation RSE system may or may not work until the
System manual for some tips to help you temperature is within the operating range. The
reduce distractions while driving. operating range for the RSE system is above
−4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C). If the
Rear Seat Entertainment System temperature of your vehicle is outside of this
range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat temperature is within the operating range of the
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system RSE system.
works with the vehicle’s audio system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE
Parental Control
system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video The RSE system may have a Parental Control
display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless feature, depending on which radio you have. The
headphones, and a remote control. See Radio with Parental Control feature turns off the video
CD and DVD (MP3) on page 305 for more screen and Rear Seat Audio (RSA). This feature
information on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system. also disables all button operations from the remote
control and all audio button operations from the
RSA. This feature can be used to gain the
attention of the rear passengers that are using
headphones.

337
To enable Parental Control, press and hold the Headphones
radio power button for more than two seconds. If
on, the radio, video screen, and RSA turns
off. If a DVD and/or CD is playing, it stops. While
Parental Control is on, either a padlock icon or
a text message comes on, depending on the radio.
When the radio is turned back on, the RSE
system remains in Parental Control.
To turn off Parental Control, press and hold the
radio power button for more than two seconds. The
video screen and RSA returns to the state they
were in before Parental Control was turned on and
if the padlock icon is on the display, it disappears.
Parental Control is also turned off by inserting
or ejecting a disc, by pressing the play icon on the
radio DVD display menu, or when the ignition is The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless
turned off. headphones that are dedicated to this system.
These headphones are used to listen to media
such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio,
any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or
the auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has
this feature. The wireless headphones have an
On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
control.
If your vehicle has a third row video screen
display, it has two additional headphones.

338
Push the power button to turn on the headphones. For optimal audio performance, the headphones
An indicator light located on the headphones must be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)
comes on. If the light does not come on, appears on the upper left side, above the ear pad
the batteries may need to be replaced. See and should be positioned on the left ear. The
“Battery Replacement” later in this section for more symbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side,
information. Switch the headphones to Off when above the ear pad and should be positioned on
not in use. Channel 1 is dedicated to the video the right ear.
screen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a
selections. new universal remote control can be purchased.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the If this happens, make sure the universal
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut remote control uses a code set of Toshiba®.
off automatically to save the battery power if the
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones are out of range of the transmitters
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
for more than three minutes. If you move too
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
in a cool, dry place.
headphones lose the audio signal.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
The headphones automatically turns off after
become worn or damaged, the pads can be
four hours of continuous use.
replaced separately from the headphone set
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the through your dealer for more information.
volume control located on the right side.

339
Battery Replacement Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To change the batteries on the headphones, do
the following:
1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver
to loosen the battery door located on the left
side of the headphones. Slide the battery
door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor
screw. console, allow audio or video signals to be
connected from an auxiliary device such as a
If the headphones are to be stored for a long camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them Adapter connectors or cables may be required to
in a cool, dry place. connect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical
home entertainment system equipment. The yellow
jack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B) is
for the left audio input. The red jack (C) is for the
right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.

340
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, Audio Output
connect an external auxiliary device to the
color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may
device and the video screen power on. If the be heard through the following possible sources:
video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing • Wireless Headphones
the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control • Vehicle Speakers
switches the video screen from the DVD
player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can • Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary seat audio system, if your vehicle has this
device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD feature.
and DVD (MP3) on page 305 for more information. The RSE system always transmits the audio
How to Change the RSE Video Screen signal to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” earlier in this
Settings
section for more information.
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to
screen brightness, and setup menu language
the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system,
can be changed from the on screen setup menu.
if your vehicle has this feature. The DVD
To change any feature, do the following:
player may be selected as an audio source on the
1. Press the display menu button on the remote RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on
control. page 348 for more information.
2. Use the remote control menu navigation
arrows and the enter button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the display menu button again to
remove the setup menu from the screen.

341
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its
the radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle locked position, the screen remains on, this is
has this feature, the rear seat passengers are able normal, and the DVD continues to play through the
to hear audio from the auxiliary device through previous audio source. Use the remote control
the wireless or wired headphones. The front seat power button or eject the disc to turn off the
passengers are able to listen to playback from screen.
this device through the vehicle speakers by The RSE overhead console contains the infrared
selecting AUX as the source on the radio. receivers for the wireless headphones and the
Video Screen infrared receivers for the remote control. They are
located at the rear of the console.
The video screen is located in the RSE overhead
console. Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
To use the video screen, do the following: the Video Screen” later in this section for
1. Push the release button located on the RSE more information.
overhead console.
2. Turn the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its locked position.

342
Remote Control Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console
and press the desired button. Direct sunlight
or very bright light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of sight could
also affect the function of the remote control.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot,
the remote control power button can be used to
turn on the video screen display and start the disc.
The radio can also turn on the video screen O (Power): Press this button to turn the video
display. See Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) on
screen on and off.
page 305 for more information.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the
or in direct sunlight can damage it, and the remote control backlight on. The backlight
repairs will not be covered by your warranty. automatically times out after seven to ten seconds if
Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry no other button is pressed while the backlight is on.
place.

343
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
the main menu of the DVD. This function could rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this
vary for each disc. button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every playing a DVD. Press this button while a DVD is
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu. playing the DVD.
After making a selection press the enter button.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,
This button only operates when using a DVD.
you may be able to do slow play by pressing
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the pause button then pressing the fast forward
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu. button. The DVD continues playing in a slow play
mode. You may also, depending on the radio,
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice perform reverse slow play by pressing the pause
that is highlighted in any menu. button and then pressing the fast reverse
button. To cancel slow play mode, press the
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust play/pause button.
the brightness, screen display mode (normal,
full, or zoom), and display the language menu. t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button
to return to the start of the current track or
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current chapter. Press this button again to go to the
active menu and return to the previous menu. previous track or chapter. This button might not
This button operates only when the display menu work when the DVD is playing the copyright
or a DVD menu is active. information or the previews.

344
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go { (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
to the beginning of the next chapter or track. subtitles and to move through subtitle options
This button might not work when the DVD when a DVD is playing. The format and content of
is playing the copyright information or the this function varies for each disc.
previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing source.
a DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
reverse button. This button might not work when angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the DVD is playing. The format and content of
previews. this function varies for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a
track number selection.
DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the \ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds
fast forward button. This button may not work after entering a numeric selection, to clear all
when the DVD is playing the copyright information numerical inputs.
or the previews.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio select chapter or track numbers greater than
tracks on DVDs that have this feature when nine. Press this button before entering the number.
the DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function varies for each disc.

345
Battery Replacement Problem Recommended Action
To change the remote control batteries, do the No power. The ignition might not be
following: turned on or in accessory.
The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
1. Remove the battery compartment door screen. There are black settings in the setup menu
located on the bottom of the remote control. borders on the top and by pressing the display
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the remote
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. it looks stretched out. control.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, In auxiliary mode, the Check the auxiliary input
using the diagram on the inside of the battery picture moves or scrolls. connections at both
compartment. devices.
3. Close the battery door securely. The remote control does Check to make sure there
not work. is no obstruction between
If the remote control is to be stored for a long the remote control and the
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them transmitter window.
in a cool, dry place. Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the DVD
the DVD starts where I left player resumes playing
off and sometimes at the where the DVD was
beginning. stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times
the DVD player begins to
play from the beginning of
the DVD.

346
 Problem Recommended Action DVD Display Error Messages
The auxiliary source is Check that the RSE video The DVD display error message depends on
running but there is no screen is in the auxiliary
picture or sound. source mode. which radio you have. The video screen may
Check the auxiliary input display one of the following:
connections at both
devices. Disc Load/Eject Error: This message is
Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions, displayed when there are disc load or eject
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception problems.
or buzzes. range, and interference
from cellular telephone Disc Format Error: This message is displayed, if
towers or by using your the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong
cellular telephone in the side up, or if the disc is damaged.
vehicle.
Check that the Disc Region Error: This message is displayed, if
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left) the disc is not from a correct region.
and R (right) on the
headphones. No Disc Inserted: This message is displayed, if
I lost the remote and/or See your dealer for
no disc is present when the EJECT button is
the headphones. assistance. pressed on the radio.
The DVD is playing, but Check that the RSE video
there is no picture or screen is sourced to the
sound. DVD player.

347
DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position to and control any of the music sources: radio,
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However,
walkie talkies. the rear seat passengers can only control the
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player music sources the front seat passengers are not
when operating one of these devices in or near the listening to (except on some radios where
vehicle. dual control is allowed). For example, rear seat
passengers can listen to and control a CD through
*Excludes the OnStar® System. the headphones, while the driver listens to the
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console radio through the front speakers. The rear
seat passengers have control of the volume for
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, each set of headphones.
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean
water. You can operate the RSA functions even when
the main radio is off.
Cleaning the Video Screen Audio can be heard through wired headphones
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean (not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care If your vehicle has this feature, audio can also
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless
damage may result. headphones.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when
the RSA audio is active through the headphones.

348
 SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the radio (AM/FM), XM (if equipped), CD,
and if your vehicle has these features, DVD,
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM
(if equipped), press the seek up or the seek
down arrow to go to the next or the previous
station or channels and stay there. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrow
until the display flashes, to tune to an individual
station. The display will stop flashing after
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on the buttons have not been pushed for more than
or off. two seconds. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to listening to the radio.
decrease the volume of the wired headphones.
The left knob controls the left headphones and the
right knob controls the right headphones.

349
While listening to a disc, press the seek up arrow When a disc audio is playing in the CD or DVD
to goto the next track or chapter on the disc. changer, press this button to select the next disc, if
Press the seek down arrow to go back to the start multiple discs are loaded. This function is
of the current track or chapter (if more than inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, passengers are listening to the disc.
with some radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed,
press the PROG button to perform the menu
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, function, enter.
press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to
perform a cursor up or down on the menu. Theft-Deterrent Feature
Hold the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to
perform a cursor right or left on the menu. THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
next preset radio station or channel set on the Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
main radio. This function is inactive, with moved to a different vehicle, it does not operate
some radios, if the front seat passengers are and LOCKED displays.
listening to the radio.
When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or
DVD audio. This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to
the disc.

350
Audio Steering Wheel Controls g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release
this button to silence the vehicle speakers only.
If your vehicle has audio The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if
steering wheel controls, your vehicle has these features, does not mute.
they could differ Press and release this button again, to turn
depending on your the sound on.
vehicle’s options. Some
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press
audio controls can
and hold this button for longer than one second to
be adjusted at
initiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition”
the steering wheel.
in the Navigation System manual for more
They include the
information.
following:
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this
button for longer than one second to interact
with the OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has
xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the down the navigation system, press and hold this
arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio button for longer than one second to initiate voice
station stored as a favorite. recognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar®
mode. See the OnStar® System on page 173 in
When a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or the this manual for more information.
down arrow to go to the next or previous track or
chapter.

351
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch AM
between the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),
CD, and if your vehicle has these features, The range for most AM stations is greater than for
DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume. the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the when things like storms and power lines interfere
next radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™ with radio reception. When this happens, try
(if equipped). Press this button to go to the next reducing the treble on your radio.
track or chapter while sourced to the CD or
DVD slot. FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
Radio Reception reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
Frequency interference and static during normal causing the sound to fade in and out.
radio reception can occur if items such as
cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices are
plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.

352
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous the hole and the outer edge.
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Care of the CD and DVD Player
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can cause advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time. of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate CD mechanism.
interference.

Care of Your CDs and DVDs

Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.

353
Rear Side Window Antenna If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular
telephone to your vehicle, and the antenna needs
Your AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger to be attached to the glass, be sure that you
rear side windows. Be sure that the inside do not damage the grid lines for the AM-FM
surfaces of the rear side windows are not antennas or place the cellular telephone antenna
scratched and that the lines on the glass are not over the grid lines.
damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they
could interfere with radio reception. XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to System
clear the inside of the rear side windows
may affect radio reception or damage the rear The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
window defogger. Repairs would not be the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
covered by your warranty. Do not clear the snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
inside of the rear side windows with sharp The performance of the XM™ system may
objects. be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
with metallic film. The metallic film in some interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
tinting materials will interfere with or distort the Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
incoming radio reception. Any damage not obstructed.
caused to your antenna due to metallic tinting
materials will not be covered by your
warranty.
Because this antenna is built into your rear side
window, there is a reduced risk of damage caused
by car washes and vandals.

354
 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 396
Vehicle ..................................................... 356 Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 397
Defensive Driving ...................................... 356 Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 398
Drunken Driving ........................................ 357 Winter Driving ........................................... 400
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 360 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Braking ...................................................... 360 Ice, or Snow .......................................... 404
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 361 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 405
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 363 Recovery Hooks ........................................ 406
Locking Rear Axle ..................................... 363 Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 407
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 363 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Steering .................................................... 367 Equipment .............................................. 412
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 369 Towing ........................................................ 417
Passing ..................................................... 369 Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 417
Loss of Control .......................................... 371 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 418
Off-Road Driving ........................................ 372 Level Control ............................................. 421
Driving at Night ......................................... 389 Autoride® ................................................... 422
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 390 Towing a Trailer ........................................ 422
City Driving ............................................... 393 Trailer Recommendations .......................... 440
Freeway Driving ........................................ 394

355
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle {CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
Defensive Driving
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: or expressways, it means “Always expect
Drive defensively. the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
Please start with a very important safety device in or other drivers are going to be careless
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
Are for Everyone on page 38. might do and be ready. Rear-end
collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes
proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with
resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help
do these things, or pull off the road in a
safe place to do them. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save
your life.

356
Drunken Driving Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink
Death and injury associated with drinking and alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one persons under 21, it is against the law in
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
thousands of victims every year. medical, psychological, and developmental
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to reasons for these laws.
drive a vehicle: The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
• Judgment safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
• Muscular Coordination How much is “too much” if someone plans
• Vision to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
• Attentiveness Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who someone who is drinking depends upon four things:
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more • The amount of alcohol consumed
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths • The drinker’s body weight
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured. • The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol

357
According to the American Medical Association, a It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce example, if the same person drank three double
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like lower BAC level.
whiskey, gin, or vodka. There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.

358
But the ability to drive is affected well below a There is something else about drinking and driving
BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that that many people do not know. Medical research
the driving skills of many people are impaired at a shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics anyone who has been drinking — driver or
show that the chance of being in a collision passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of of being killed or permanently disabled is
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of higher than if the person had not been drinking.
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is {CAUTION:
12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the
chance is 25 times greater! Drinking and then driving is very
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number attentiveness, and judgment can be
of cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” affected by even a small amount of
is not the right answer. What if there is an alcohol. You can have a serious — or
emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when even fatal — collision if you drive after
a child darts into the street? A person with even a
drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly
enough to avoid the collision. ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not
drink.

359
Control of a Vehicle Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
You have three systems that make your vehicle with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, or more with another. Age, physical condition,
the steering, and the accelerator. All three alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
systems have to do their work at the places where So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
the tires meet the road. three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
than the tires and road can provide. That means keeping enough space between your vehicle and
you can lose control of your vehicle. See others is important.
StabiliTrak® System on page 363. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
Modifications on page 444. whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition
of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the
amount of brake force applied.
Braking
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
See Brake System Warning Light on page 249. in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
Braking action involves perception time and braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
reaction time. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
First, you have to decide to push on the brake much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time. following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.

360
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are If there is a problem
driving, brake normally but do not pump the with ABS, this warning
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to light will stay on.
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have See Anti-Lock Brake
some power brake assist. But you will use it System Warning
when you brake. Once the power assist is used Light on page 251.
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and problem, both the brake and ABS warning lights
Modifications on page 444. will come on accompanied by a 10-second
chime. The lights and chime will come on each
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) time the ignition is turned on until the problem is
repaired. See your dealer for service.
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.

361
 ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving

safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
computer will separately work the brakes at each updates on wheel speed and controls braking
front wheel and at both rear wheels. pressure accordingly.

362
Remember: ABS does not change the time you Locking Rear Axle
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud,
time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS. has no traction and the other does, this feature will
allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake StabiliTrak® System
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice Your vehicle may be equipped with the
some noise, but this is normal. StabiliTrak® system which combines antilock
brake, traction and stability control systems and
helps the driver maintain directional control of the
Braking in Emergencies vehicle in most driving conditions.
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you away, the system performs several diagnostic
more than even the very best braking. checks to ensure there are no problems. You may
hear or feel the system working. This is normal and
does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle.
The system should initialize before the vehicle
reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In some cases, it may
take approximately two miles of driving before the
system initializes.

363
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the The StabiliTrak® light
StabiliTrak® light along with one of the following will flash on the
messages will be displayed on the Driver instrument panel cluster
Information Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL when the system is
OFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, both on and activated.
STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If
these DIC messages appear, make sure the
StabiliTrak® system has not been turned off using
the StabiliTrak® on/off button. Then turn the You may also feel or hear the system working;
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock this is normal.
position to the three o’clock position. If this clears The traction control
the message(s), your vehicle does not need disable button is located
servicing. If this does not clear the message(s), on the instrument
then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then panel below the climate
turn it back on again to reset the system. If any controls.
of these messages still appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), your vehicle should be
taken in for service. For more information on
the DIC messages, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 260.

364
The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can be It is recommended to leave the system on for
turned off by pressing and releasing the normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary
StabiliTrak® button if both systems (traction control to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in
and StabiliTrak®) were previously on. To disable sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to
both traction control and StabiliTrak®, press “rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also
and hold the button for five seconds. be necessary to turn off the system when driving
Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turned on in extreme off-road conditions where high
by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button if wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
not automatically shut off for any other reason. Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 404.

When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turned off, When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability
the StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCS system is automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak®
off or StabiliTrak® off message will be displayed on light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFF
the DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle will still message will appear on the DIC. Both traction
have brake-traction control when traction control is control and StabiliTrak® are automatically disabled
off, but will not be able to use the engine speed in this condition.
management system. See “Traction Control
Operation” next for more information.
When the traction control system has been turned
off, you may still hear system noises as a result
of the brake-traction control coming on.

365
Traction Control Operation Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS
The traction control system is part of the and brake warning lights and the SERVICE
StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel STABILITRAK message are displayed, you
spin by reducing engine power to the wheels could damage the transfer case. The repairs
(engine speed management) and by applying would not be covered by your warranty. Reduce
brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
control) as necessary. excessively while these lights and this message
The traction control system is enabled are displayed.
automatically when you start your vehicle. It will The traction control system may activate on
activate and the StabiliTrak® light will flash if dry or rough roads or under conditions such as
it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/
beginning to lose traction while driving. If you turn downshifts of the transmission. When this happens,
off traction control, only the brake-traction you may notice a reduction in acceleration, or may
control portion of traction control will work. The hear a noise or vibration. This is normal.
engine speed management will be disabled. In this If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
mode, engine power is not reduced automatically activates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and the
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. cruise control will automatically disengage. When
This can cause the brake-traction control to road conditions allow you to use cruise again, you
activate constantly. may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise
Control on page 211.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If
the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.

366
Steering The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of the tires and the road surface, the
Power Steering angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one
If you lose power steering assist because the factor you can control.
engine stops or the system is not functioning, you
can steer but it will take much more effort. Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
Steering Tips systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
speed.
much of those places. You can lose control.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents See StabiliTrak® System on page 363.
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
Here is why:
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is way you want it to go, and slow down.
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
speeds are based on good weather and road
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
want to go slower.
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
the front wheels are straight ahead.

367
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 444.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a An emergency like this requires close attention
child darts out from between parked cars and and a quick decision. If you are holding the
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
is the time for evasive action — steering around hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
the problem. and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies have avoided the object.
like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking The fact that such emergency situations are
on page 360. It is better to remove as much speed always possible is a good reason to practice
as you can from a possible collision. Then steer defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts
around the problem, to the left or right depending properly.
on the space available.

368
Off-Road Recovery Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
you are driving. accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the

pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.

369
So here are some tips for passing: • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane
sides, and to crossroads for situations and do not get too close. Time your move so
that might affect your passing patterns. If you you will be increasing speed as the time comes
have any doubt whatsoever about making to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to
a successful pass, wait for a better time. pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, by dropping back. And if something happens to
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
that might indicate a turn or an intersection, slow down and drop back again and wait for
delay your pass. A broken center line another opportunity.
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
line, even if the road seems empty of
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
approaching traffic.
glance over your shoulder and check the
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want blind spot.
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.

370
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your Loss of Control
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass. Let us review what driving experts say about what
When you are far enough ahead of the passed happens when the three control systems — brakes,
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
move back into the right lane. Remember that, driver has asked.
if your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
is convex, the vehicle you just passed may steer and constantly seek an escape route or
seem to be farther away from you than it area of less danger.
really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time Skidding
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
the next vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting are always possible.
to turn. The three types of skids correspond to your
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
you can ease a little to the right. cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.

371
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
foot off the accelerator pedal. your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® System shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
on page 363. If the StabiliTrak® System is off, cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
then an acceleration skid is also best handled by surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the you have any doubt.
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid helps avoid only the braking skid.
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
Off-Road Driving
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust four-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 360. If
your driving to these conditions. It is important your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive,
to slow down on slippery surfaces because you should not drive off-road unless you are on a
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control level, solid surface.
more limited.
The airbag system is designed to work properly
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.

372
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have The following steps must be performed on the
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is bolts and snap features to remove the air dam:
the terrain itself. 1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North 2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on
American road system behind. Traffic lanes the snap features and disengage the snaps.
are not marked. Curves are not banked. There are
no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, 3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
uphill or downhill. In short, you have gone disengaged, push forward on the air dam until
right back to nature. it is free.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
is why it is very important that you read this replace the air dam.
guide. You will find many driving tips and Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
suggestions. These will help make your off-road periods without the front fascia lower air
driving safer and more enjoyable. dam installed can cause improper air flow to
If you think you will need some more ground the engine. Always be sure to replace the front
clearance at the front of your vehicle, you fascia air dam when you are finished off-road
can remove the front fascia lower air dam. driving.
The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
two bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts and 1. Line up the snap features and push the
snap features are accessible from underneath the air dam rearward to engage the snaps.
front fascia.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.

373
Before You Go Off-Roading Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
There are some things to do before you go out. Driving
For example, be sure to have all necessary
maintenance and service work done. Check to
make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has {CAUTION:
them, are properly attached. Be sure you read
all the information about your four-wheel-drive or • Cargo on the load floor piled higher
all-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there than the seatbacks can be thrown
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the forward during a sudden stop. You or
fluid levels up where they should be? What are your passengers could be injured.
the local laws that apply to off-roading where you Keep cargo below the top of the
will be driving? If you do not know, you should seatbacks.
check with law enforcement people in the • Unsecured cargo on the load floor can
area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If be tossed about when driving over
so, be sure to get the necessary permission. rough terrain. You or your passengers
can be struck by flying objects.
Secure the cargo properly.
CAUTION: (Continued)

374
 Environmental Concerns
CAUTION: (Continued)
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and
satisfying recreation. However, it also raises
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the environmental concerns. We recognize these
vehicle’s center of gravity, making it concerns and urge every off-roader to follow these
more likely to roll over. You can be basic rules for protecting the environment:
seriously or fatally injured if the
vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads • Always use established trails, roads, and areas
inside the cargo area, not on the roof. that have been specially set aside for public
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far off-road recreational driving; obey all
forward and low as possible. posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
There are some important things to remember
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes
about how to load your vehicle.
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
• The heaviest things should be on the load unnecessary driving through streams or over
floor and forward of your rear axle. Put soft ground.
heavier items as far forward as you can.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so refuse is removed from any campsite
driving on the off-road terrain does not before leaving.
toss things around.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
You will find other important information in this permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
manual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 • Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
and Tires on page 507.
other combustible materials that could
catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s
exhaust system.
375
Traveling to Remote Areas With your arms, hands, feet, and body, you will
need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
your route. You are much less likely to get bad off-road driving. One of the best ways to
surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here
Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads. are some things to keep in mind. At higher
speeds:
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one
other vehicle. If something happens to one • You approach things faster and you have less
of them, the other can help quickly. time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to • You have less time to react.
read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a • You have more vehicle bounce when you
winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you will drive over obstacles.
want to know how to use it properly. • You will need more distance for braking,
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving especially since you are on an unpaved
surface.
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is
safe and close to home before you go into
the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some
new and different skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep
the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears
need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.

376
 Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or
{CAUTION: bump can startle you if you are not prepared for
them. Often these obstacles are hidden by
When you are driving off-road, bouncing grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall of
and quick changes in direction can easily the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
throw you out of position. This could • Is the path ahead clear?
cause you to lose control and crash. So,
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up
whether you are driving on or off the road,
ahead?
you and your passengers should wear
safety belts. • Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects
later.
Scanning the Terrain • Will you have to stop suddenly or change
Off-road driving can take you over many different direction quickly?
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,
terrain and its many different features. Here are keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,
some things to consider. troughs, or other surface features can jerk
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you the wheel out of your hands if you are not
over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, prepared.
mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affects When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other
the steering, acceleration, and braking of your obstacles, the wheels can leave the ground. If this
vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind happens, even with one or two wheels, you
of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.
sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor
traction, and longer braking distances.

377
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is Driving on Off-Road Hills
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking. Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or
across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind judgment and an understanding of what your
of alertness from driving on paved roads and vehicle can and cannot do. There are some hills
highways. There are no road signs, posted speed that simply cannot be driven, no matter how
limits, or signal lights. You have to use your well built the vehicle.
own good judgment about what is safe and what
is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on {CAUTION:
any road. And this is certainly true for off-road
driving. At the very time you need special alertness Many hills are simply too steep for any
and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, vehicle. If you drive up them, you will
and judgment can be affected by even a small stall. If you drive down them, you cannot
amount of alcohol. You could have a serious — or
control your speed. If you drive across
even fatal — accident if you drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. them, you will roll over. You could be
See Drunken Driving on page 357. seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.

378
Approaching a Hill • Are there obstructions on the hill that can
block your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it or ruts?
is one of those hills that is just too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard • What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
to judge. On a very small hill, for example, embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
there may be a smooth, constant incline with only walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart
a small change in elevation where you can way to find out.
easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, • Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often
the incline may get steeper as you near the have ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks
top, but you may not see this because the crest of because they are more susceptible to the
the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs. effects of erosion.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will
the surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so
you will not have to make turning maneuvers?

379
Driving Uphill • Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, find another route.
you need to take some special steps.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the top of the hill.
steering wheel.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
maintain your speed. Do not use more power
than you need, because you do not want • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the
the wheels to start spinning or sliding. hill to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the
day. They make your vehicle more visible to
{CAUTION: oncoming traffic.

Turning or driving across steep hills can

be dangerous. You could lose traction, {CAUTION:
slide sideways, and possibly roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full
When driving up hills, always try to go speed can cause an accident. There could
straight up. be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even
another vehicle. You could be seriously
injured or killed. As you near the top of a
hill, slow down and stay alert.

380
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or • If your engine has stopped running, you will
is about to stall, and I cannot make it up need to restart it. With the brake pedal
the hill? pressed and the parking brake still applied,
shift the transmission to PARK (P) and restart
A: If this happens, there are some things you the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R),
should do, and there are some things you release the parking brake, and slowly back
must not do. First, here is what you should do: down the hill as straight as possible in
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle REVERSE (R).
and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply • As you are backing down the hill, put your left
the parking brake. hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock
• If your engine is still running, shift the position. This way, you will be able to tell
transmission to REVERSE (R), release the if your wheels are straight and maneuver as
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in you back down. It is best that you back
REVERSE (R). down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning
the wheel too far to the left or right will
increase the possibility of a rollover.

381
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
{CAUTION:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting
into NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
and regain forward momentum. This will not
work. Your vehicle will roll backwards can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
very quickly and you could go out of control. transmission is in PARK (P). This is
because the NEUTRAL position on the
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop
the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. transfer case overrides the transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking You or someone else could be injured. If
brake, and slowly back straight down. you are going to leave your vehicle, set
the parking brake and shift the
transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are about

to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep
enough to cause you to roll over if you turn
around. If you cannot make it up the hill, you
must back straight down the hill.

382
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down • Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
the hill and decide I just cannot do it. What Logs? Boulders?
should I do? • What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission hidden creek bank or even a river bottom
in PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave with large rocks?
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then
uphill side and stay clear of the path the try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and
vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help
shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when your brakes and they will not have to do all
you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle
under control at all times.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want
to consider a number of things:
{CAUTION:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to Heavy braking when going down a hill can
maintain vehicle control?
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? This could cause loss of control and a
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly
when descending a hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.

383
Q: Are there some things I should not do Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
when driving down a hill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going
A: Yes! These are important because if you uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here is
ignore them you could lose control and what to do.
have a serious accident. 1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take brakes. Apply the parking brake.
you across the incline of the hill. A hill that 2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,
is not too steep to drive down may be restart the engine.
too steep to drive across. You could roll over
if you do not drive straight down. 3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking
brake, and drive straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” 4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Your brakes will have to do all the work
and could overheat and fade.

384
Driving Across an Incline But when you drive across an incline, the much
more narrow track width — the distance
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go between the left and right wheels — may not
across the incline of a hill. If this happens, prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
you have to decide whether to try to drive across Also, driving across an incline puts more weight
the incline. Here are some things to consider: on the downhill wheels. This could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
{CAUTION: • Surface conditions can be a problem when
you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy
spots, or even wet grass can cause your
Driving across an incline that is too steep tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle
will make your vehicle roll over. You could slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip
be seriously injured or killed. If you have it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
any doubt about the steepness of the • Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of
incline, do not drive across it. Find the incline even worse. If you drive across a
another route instead. rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill
wheels drop into a rut or depression, your
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down vehicle can tilt even more.
may be too steep to drive across. When you go For reasons like these, you need to decide
straight up or down a hill, the length of the carefully whether to try to drive across an incline.
wheel base — the distance from the front Just because the trail goes across the incline
wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the does not mean you have to drive it. The last
likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. vehicle to try it might have rolled over.

385
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that
is not too steep, but I hit some loose
gravel and start to slide downhill. What
should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help
straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side
slipping. However, a much better way to
prevent this is to get out and “walk the course”
so you know what the surface is like before
you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline

{CAUTION: If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an

incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a on the uphill side, even if the door there is
vehicle stopped across an incline is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be
could be crushed or killed. Always get out right in its path.
on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the
stay well clear of the rollover path. path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

386
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire
traction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, your control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is
wheels will not get good traction. You cannot so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.
accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, And if you do get moving, poor steering and
and you will need longer braking distances. difficult braking can cause you to slide out of
It is best to use a low gear when you are in control.
mud —the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.
In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle
moving so you do not get stuck. {CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change
in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers
loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed can be dangerous. Underwater springs,
sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws
your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could
an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking. fall through the ice and you and your
Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or passengers could drown. Drive your
abrupt maneuvers. vehicle on safe surfaces only.

387
Driving in Water If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
{CAUTION: occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And,
as long as your tailpipe is under water, you
will never be able to start your engine. When you
Driving through rushing water can be go through water, remember that when your
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
vehicle downstream and you and your
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 390
passengers could drown. If it is only
for more information on driving through water.
shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you After Off-Road Driving
could lose traction and roll the vehicle
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
over. Do not drive through rushing water. the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood After operation in mud or sand, have the brake
waters demand extreme caution. linings cleaned and checked. These substances
Find out how deep the water is before you drive can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the
through it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel body structure, steering, suspension, wheels,
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, check
probably will not get through. Also, water that deep the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
can damage your axle and other vehicle parts. Your vehicle will require more frequent service
due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule for additional information.

388
Driving at Night No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
One reason is that some drivers are likely to much light to see the same thing at night as a
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night 20-year-old.
vision problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
Here are some tips on night driving. night vision. For example, if you spend the
• Drive defensively. day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
• Do not drink and drive. adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps behind you. glare from headlamps, but they also make a
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need lot of things invisible.
to slow down and keep more space between You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
you and other vehicles. headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
much road ahead. as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
• In remote areas, watch for animals. slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe the approaching headlamps.
place and rest.

389
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On

a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or
turn as well because your tire-to-road traction is
not as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do
not have much tread left, you will get even less
traction.

390
It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if
rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface
may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are {CAUTION:
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if your windshield wiper blades are in good may not work as well in a quick stop and
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see may cause pulling to one side. You could
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, lose control of the vehicle.
the edge of the road, and even people walking. After driving through a large puddle of
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid lightly until the brakes work normally.
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, Driving too fast through large water puddles or
or when strips of rubber start to separate from the even going through some car washes can cause
inserts. problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try
to slow down before you hit them.

391
Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
build up under your tires that they can actually ride puddles or standing water, water can come in
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet through the engine’s air intake and badly
enough and you are going fast enough. When your damage the engine. Never drive through water
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
with the road. vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if standing water, drive through them very slowly.
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure Driving Through Flowing Water
in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water
is standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and {CAUTION:
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. forces. If you try to drive through flowing
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
water, as you might at a low water
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining. crossing, your vehicle can be carried
away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If
this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.

392
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips City Driving
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just
your parking lamps — to help make you more
visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Tires on page 507.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is

the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.

393
Here are ways to increase your safety in city Freeway Driving
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 394.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,

parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.

394
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. use your turn signal.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks over your shoulder to make sure there is not
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on another vehicle in your blind spot.
a freeway as a passing lane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the Expect to move slightly slower at night.
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and back up. Drive on to the next exit.
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to Reduce your speed according to your
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After
slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may
to pass. tend to think you are going slower than you
actually are.

395
Before Leaving on a Long Trip Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too • Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily checked all levels?
drive in.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it clean?
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
needs service, have it done before starting out. Of
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
course, you will find experienced and able
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
service experts in GM dealerships all across North
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
America. They will be ready and willing to help
if you need it. • Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

396
Highway Hypnosis Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
Is there actually such a condition as highway
a comfortably cool interior.
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of • Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
awareness, or whatever. and to the sides. Check your vehicle’s mirrors
and instruments frequently.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of • If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and service, or parking area and take a nap, get
the rush of the wind against the vehicle that some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in
less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.

397
Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. See
Off-Road Driving on page 372 for information
about driving off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all
fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
from driving in flat or rolling terrain. the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

398
 • Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
{CAUTION: or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
will have to do all the work of slowing car or an accident.
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
poor braking or even none going down a
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
hill. You could crash. Always have the rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
engine running and your vehicle in gear and take appropriate action.
when you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.

399
Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 507.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.

400
Driving on Snow or Ice What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
Most of the time, those places where the tires But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
meet the road probably have good traction. may offer the least traction of all. You can get
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
and the road, you can have a very slippery freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip, on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
and will need to be very careful. Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
StabiliTrak® will improve your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. But you can
turn StabiliTrak® off if you ever need to. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 363 and If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 404. Even with StabiliTrak®, you will want to
slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want
to turn StabiliTrak® off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.

401
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
you will want to begin stopping sooner than a serious situation. You should probably stay
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
System (ABS) on page 361. are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
• Allow greater following distance on any help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches that you have been stopped by the snow.
may appear in shaded areas where the • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of you. If you do not have blankets or extra
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. clothing, make body insulators from
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
overpass may remain icy when the mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.

402
 {CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be Open a window just a little on the side of
careful. the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.

403
Run your engine only as long as you must. This If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the Mud, Ice, or Snow
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. need to spin the wheels, but you do not want
You will need a well-charged battery to restart to spin the wheels too fast. The method known as
the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with rocking can help you get out when you are
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. stuck, but you must use caution.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you {CAUTION:
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of speed, they can explode, and you or
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises others could be injured. And, the
every half hour or so until help comes.
transmission or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.

404
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
spin the wheels too fast while shifting transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
the transmission back and forth, you can the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
destroy the transmission. you will cause a rocking motion that may free
For information about using tire chains on your your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 530. after a few tries, it may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use the recovery hooks if your vehicle
has them. If your vehicle does need to be towed
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 417.
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into
Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low. Turn
the StabiliTrak® System off. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 363. Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible.

405
Recovery Hooks

{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight
out. Never pull on the hooks at a
sideways angle. The hooks could break
off and you or others could be injured
from the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the

vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged
and it would not be covered by warranty.
Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the front
of the vehicle. You may need to use them if you
are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to
some place where you can continue driving.

406
Loading Your Vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Label Example
or either the maximum front or rear Gross A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
parts on your vehicle can break, and it the driver’s door open, you will find the label
can change the way your vehicle handles. attached below the door lock post (striker). The
These could cause you to lose control tire and loading information label shows the
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
the life of your vehicle. maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.

407
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows 4. The resulting figure equals the available
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
For more information on tires and inflation see 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
Tires on page 507 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
page 515. available cargo and luggage load capacity is
There is also important loading information on the 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the weight may not safely exceed the available
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
later in this section. Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
1. Locate the statement “The combined vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
weight of occupants and cargo should never this reduces the available cargo and luggage
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
vehicle’s placard. a Trailer on page 422 for important information
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
and passengers that will be riding in your trailering tips.
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

408
 Example 1 Example 2

Item Description Total Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg) A Vehicle Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 1 = for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
B Weight 150 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg) B Weight 150 lbs 750 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 = (68 kg) × 5 =
C Available Occupant and 700 lbs (317 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)
Cargo Weight =

409
 Certification/Tire Label

Example 3

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
B Weight 200 lbs 1,000 lbs (453 kg) on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The
(91 kg) × 5 = label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires
C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
label for specific information about your vehicle’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
capacity weight and seating positions. The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and occupants, fuel, and cargo.
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.

410
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find {CAUTION:
out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on or either the maximum front or rear Gross
both sides of the centerline. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the parts on your vehicle can break, and it
GAWR for either the front or rear axle. can change the way your vehicle handles.
The Certification/Tire label also contains These could cause you to lose control
information about your Front Axle Reserve and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
Capacity. the life of your vehicle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out. Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
The label will help you decide how much cargo
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to
get added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.

411
If you put things inside your vehicle — like There is also important loading information for
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes. Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a Driving on page 372.
crash, they will keep going.
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
{CAUTION: Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle,
Things you put inside your vehicle can here are some things you will need to know:
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow
or turn, or in a crash. plow prep package, adding a plow can
• Put things in the cargo area of your damage your vehicle, and the repairs would
vehicle. Try to spread the weight not be covered by warranty. Unless your
evenly. vehicle was built to carry a snow plow, do not
• Never stack heavier things, like add one to your vehicle. If your vehicle has
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that the snow plow prep package, called RPO VYU,
some of them are above the tops of then the payload your vehicle can carry will
the seats. be reduced when a snow plow is installed.
• Do not leave an unsecured child Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front
restraint in your vehicle. or rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle
• When you carry something inside the Weight (GVW) are exceeded.
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.

412
Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle a Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg)
snow plow? snow plow. The total weight of all occupants and
cargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb
A: Some vehicles are built with a special snow (135 kg). This means that you may only be able to
plow prep package, called RPO VYU. If your carry one passenger. But, even this may be too
vehicle has this option, you can add a much if you have got other equipment already
plow to it, provided certain weights, such as adding to the weight of your vehicle.
the weights on the vehicle’s axles and Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a
the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), are not snow plow on your vehicle:
exceeded.
• Make sure the weight on the front and rear
axles does not exceed the axle rating for each.
Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be? • For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers
A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on must be carried, appropriate counter ballast
many things, such as: must be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter
• The options your vehicle came with, and the ballast must be properly secured so it will not
weight of those options. move during driving.
• The weight and number of passengers you
• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear
intend to carry.
ballast may be required to ensure a proper front
• The weight of items you have added to your and rear weight distribution ratio, even though
vehicle. the actual weight at the front axle may be less
• The total weight of any additional cargo you than the front axle rating.
intend to carry.

413
 • The snow plow manufacturer or installer can The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle
assist you in determining the amount of rear can be found in the lower right corner of the
ballast required, to help make sure your Certification/Tire label, as shown.
snowplow/vehicle combination does not exceed
the GVW rating, the front and rear axle ratings,
and the front and rear weight distribution ratio.
• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW
rating.

Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and

how do I calculate it?
A: Front axle reserve capacity is the difference
between your front Gross Axle Weight Rating United States Canada
(GAWR) and the front axle weight of your
vehicle with full fuel and passengers. Basically,
it is the amount of weight you can add to
your front axle before reaching your
front GAWR.

414
In order to calculate the amount of weight any For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
front accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the
the front axle, use the following formula: front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow
is 4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the
wheel base is 10 ft (305 cm), then:
W = 700 lb (318 kg)
A = 4 ft (122 cm)
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =
980 lbs (445 kg)
So, if your vehicle’s front axle reserve capacity is
more than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the
snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR.

(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is

adding to the front axle.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

415
Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment to
my vehicle? {CAUTION:
A: You can add heavier equipment on the front
of the vehicle if you compensate for it by On some vehicles that have certain front
carrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or by mounted equipment, such as a snow
positioning cargo towards the rear. This plow, it may be possible to load the front
has the effect of reducing the load on the front. axle to the front gross axle weight rating
However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and (GAWR) but not have enough weight on
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) the rear axle to have proper braking
must never be exceeded. performance. If your brakes can not work
properly, you could have a crash. To help
your brakes work properly when a snow
plow is installed, always follow the snow
plow manufacturer or installer’s
recommendation for rear ballast to ensure
a proper front and rear weight distribution
ratio, even though the actual front weight
may be less than the front GAWR, and the
total vehicle weight is less than the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). Maintaining
a proper front and rear weight distribution
ratio is necessary to provide proper
braking performance.

416
Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity? Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
A: This is the difference between your GVWR and Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep
the weight of your vehicle with full fuel and package also have an emergency roof lamp
passengers. It is the amount of weight you can provision package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the
add to your vehicle before reaching your emergency roof lamp is provided above the
GVWR. Keep in mind that reserve capacity overhead console. See Auxiliary Roof Mounted
numbers are intended as a guide when Lamp on page 218 for switch location.
selecting the amount of equipment or cargo
your vehicle can carry. If you are unsure Towing
of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go
to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Towing Your Vehicle
Your dealer can also help you with this.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
vehicle can be found in the lower right corner towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
of the Certification/Tire label as shown page 604.
previously.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
See your dealer for additional advice and vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
information about using a snow plow on your a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
vehicle. Also, see Loading Your Vehicle on Towing” following.
page 407.

417
Recreational Vehicle Towing • Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your for additional advice and equipment
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a recommendations.
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
towing, towing your vehicle with all four wheels on you would prepare your vehicle for a long
the ground, and dolly towing, towing your trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”. a Long Trip on page 396.

With the proper preparation and equipment, many Dinghy Towing

vehicles can be towed in these ways. See Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle
Here are some important things to consider before with all four wheels on the ground, the
you do recreational vehicle towing: transmission could be damaged. The repairs
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with all four
manufacturer’s recommendations. wheels on the ground.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed
restrictions on how far and how long they with all four wheels on the ground.
can tow. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions
for internal lubrication while being towed.

418
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See

Four-Wheel Drive on page 150 for the proper
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle: procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N)
position for your vehicle.
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
6. Release the parking brake only after the
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on. vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
3. Firmly set the parking brake. the towing vehicle.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the 7. Turn the ignition off.
tow vehicle.

419
Dolly Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground, the
transmission could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Never
tow your vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed
with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions
for internal lubrication while being towed.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles can be towed on a dolly
with the front wheels on the ground provided
that the wheels are straight.
If your vehicle is not equipped with StabiliTrak®,
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, it is 1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.
not designed to be dolly towed. If you need to tow
your vehicle, see “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this 2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
section. 3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow dolly.

420
 Level Control
{CAUTION: Automatic Level Control
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s The automatic level control rear suspension is
transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause available on two-wheel drive and four-wheel drive
your vehicle to roll even if the light-duty vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
others could be injured. Make sure the This type of level control is fully automatic and will
parking brake is firmly set before you shift provide a better leveled riding position as well
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. as better handling under a variety of passenger
and loading conditions. An air compressor
connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle
Four-Wheel Drive on page 150 for the height. The system is activated when the
proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically
position for your vehicle. adjust vehicle height thereafter. The system
7. Release the parking brake only after the may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned
the towing vehicle. off. You may hear the air compressor operating
when the height is being adjusted.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate,
thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting
the hitch.

421
Autoride® Towing a Trailer
®
If equipped, the Autoride feature will provide a Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New
superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety Vehicle Break-In on page 139 for more information.
of passenger and loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer {CAUTION:
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed,
wheel to body position, lift/dive and steering
position of the vehicle. The controller then sends If you do not use the correct equipment
signals to each shock absorber to independently and drive properly, you can lose control
adjust the damping level to provide the optimum when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
vehicle ride. trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul switch
that, when engaged, will provide additional control passengers could be seriously injured. Pull
of the shock absorbers. This additional control a trailer only if you have followed all the
results in better ride and handling characteristics steps in this section. Ask your dealer for
when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer. See advice and information about towing a
Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 259 for more trailer with your vehicle.
information.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs
not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see
your dealer for important information about
towing a trailer with your vehicle.

422
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, • Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
you should read the information in “Weight of 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Your engine, axle or other parts could be
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle damaged.
by itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, • Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
braking, handling, durability and fuel economy. you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.
and it has to be used properly. This helps your engine and other parts of
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety • You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to
rules. Many of these are important for your safety shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if
and that of your passengers. So please read necessary, a lower gear selection if the
this section carefully before you pull a trailer. transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions). See “Tow/Haul
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer Mode” later in this section.
If you do, here are some important points: Three important considerations have to do with
• There are many different laws, including speed weight:
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. • The weight of the trailer
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
• The weight of the trailer tongue
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state • The weight on your vehicle’s tires
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.

423
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The
purpose of the Tow/Haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the
predictability of transmission shifts when
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while
requiring less throttle pedal activity when
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. Press this button at the end of the shift lever to
• Increase the charging system voltage to assist enable/disable the tow/haul mode.
in recharging a battery installed in a trailer.
A light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to
indicate that tow/haul
mode has been
selected.

424
Your vehicle is equipped with a button at the end of Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly
the shift lever which, when pressed, enables loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause
tow/haul. Your vehicle may be equipped with damage. However, there is no benefit to the
Autoride® which further improves your vehicle’s ride selection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle is
while towing. See Autoride® on page 422 for more unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may
information. When the button is pressed, a light on result in unpleasant engine and transmission
the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul has been selected. Tow/Haul may be Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a
turned off by pressing the button again, at which heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
time the indicator light on the instrument panel will
turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn off Weight of the Trailer
Tow/Haul every time it is started. How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
least 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
Weight Rating (GCWR). See Weight of the pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
Trailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is most useful on any special equipment that you have on
under the following driving conditions: your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
heavy load through rolling terrain. Tongue” later in this section for more information.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
heavy load in stop and go traffic. only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or the required trailering equipment. The weight
heavy load in busy parking lots where of additional optional equipment, passengers and
improved low speed control of the vehicle is cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
desired. from the maximum trailer weight.

425
Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.

C-1500 (2WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR

4800 V8 3.23 4,200 lbs (1 905 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
3.73 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
3.42 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
5300 V8
3.73 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
5300 V8 (Extended 3.73 7,100 lbs (3 220 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
Models) 4.10 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6000 V8 (Extended
4.10 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
Models)

K-1500 (4WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR

5300 V8 3.73 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
4.10 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5300 V8 (Extended 3.73 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
Models) 4.10 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6000 V8 (Extended 4.10 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
Models)

426
 C-2500 (2WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR
6000 V8 (Extended 3.73 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
Models) 4.10 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)

K-2500 (4WD Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR

6000 V8 (Extended 3.73 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
Models) 4.10 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)

The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is You can ask your dealer for our trailering
the total allowable weight of the completely information or advice, or you can write us at the
loaded vehicle and trailer including any address listed in your Warranty and Owner
passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. Assistance Information Booklet.
The GCWR for your vehicle should not be In Canada, write to:
exceeded.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

427
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be a maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should
Vehicle for more information about your vehicle’s be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded
maximum load capacity. trailer weight, up to a maximum of 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) for the 1500 series and up to a maximum
of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the 2500 series with a
weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue
weight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
extension that will position the hitch ball closest
to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect
of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.

428
After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right by moving some items
around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross You can expect tongue weight to be at least
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear 10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional because the weight is applied well behind the
weight may reduce your trailering capacity more rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater
than the total of the additional weight. than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times
Consider the following example: as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,
has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The
of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

429
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs
some of the latest options and you have a front seat (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. You may effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times
add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle weight and the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by
400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. Your 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only
vehicle now weighs: 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue
weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded
trailer weight, you can expect that the largest
trailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs
(2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
your vehicle and trailer.
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity
to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may
go further and think you must limit tongue weight
to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid
exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle.

430
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the Carrying Hitches
upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers
on the Certification label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 407 for more information. Then be sure you
don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer
tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make
sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before
you apply the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you will need the
right hitch. (A) Body to Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch
must be adjusted so the distance (A) remains
the same both before and after coupling the trailer
to the tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.

431
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will Trailer Brakes
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to
use a properly mounted weight-distributing hitch If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
and sway control of the proper size. This equipment loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they
is very important for proper vehicle loading and must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
good handling when driving. Always use a sway instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
control if the trailer will weigh more than these able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
limits. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
controls. your trailer cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic
brake system.
Safety Chains
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
You should always attach safety chains between hydraulic brake system only if:
your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer to help • The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it (20 650 kPa) of pressure.
becomes separated from the hitch. • The trailer’s brake system will use less than
Attach the safety chains to the attaching point on 0.02 cubic inches (0.3 cc) of fluid from your
the hitch platform. If you are towing with an vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both
aftermarket hitch, following the trailer or hitch braking systems won’t work well. You could
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching even lose your brakes.
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so If everything checks out this far, make the brake
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety tap at the port on the master cylinder that
chains to drag on the ground. sends the fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use
copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend
and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.

432
Driving with a Trailer
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: • Keep the rear-most windows closed.

• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
If you have a rear-most window open and through a window in the rear or
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon another opening, drive with your front,
monoxide (CO) could come into your main heating or cooling system on
and with the fan on any speed. This
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It
will bring fresh, outside air into your
can cause unconsciousness or death. See vehicle. Do not use the climate control
Engine Exhaust on page 160. To maximize setting for maximum air because it
your safety when towing a trailer: only recirculates the air inside your
• Have your exhaust system inspected vehicle. See Climate Control System
for leaks, and make necessary repairs on page 227.
before starting on your trip.
CAUTION: (Continued) Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

433
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and Backing Up
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
by hand to be sure the brakes are working. to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
This lets you check your electrical connection at back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
the same time. guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure Making Turns
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working. Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
Following Distance contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead while trailering.
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
that require heavy braking and sudden turns. turns than normal. Do this so your trailer
won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
Passing trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.

434
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,
The arrows on your instrument panel will a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too
flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also conditions).
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change lanes or stop. You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode
if the transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your Mode” earlier in this section for more information.
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the
bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may When towing at high altitude on steep uphill
think drivers behind you are seeing your signal grades, consider the following: Engine coolant at
when they are not. It’s important to check higher altitudes will boil at a lower temperature
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still than at or near sea level. If you turn your engine
working. off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
Driving On Grades similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let
the engine run while parked (preferably on
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
level ground) with the automatic transmission in
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning
don’t shift down, you might have to use your
the engine off. If you do get the overheat warning,
brakes so much that they would get hot and no
see Engine Overheating on page 473.
longer work well.

435
Parking on Hills 5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION: 6. Release the regular brakes.

You really should not park your vehicle,

with a trailer attached, on a hill. If {CAUTION:
something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and It can be dangerous to get out of your
both your vehicle and the trailer can be vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
damaged. PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, If you have left the engine running, the
here’s how to do it: vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
1. Apply your regular brake, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, use the steps that follow.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels. Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb CAUTION: (Continued)
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).

436
 Maintenance When Trailer Towing
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive Schedule for more on this. Things that are
vehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will especially important in trailer operation are
be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine
PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. brake system. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea
When You Are Ready to Leave After to review these sections before you start your trip.
Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.

437
Trailer Wiring Harness The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer. • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Basic Trailer Wiring
• Brown: Taillamps
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin
connector, is located at the rear of the vehicle and • White: Ground
is tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harness • Light Green: Back-up Lamps
connector can be plugged into a seven-pin • Red: Battery Feed*
universal heavy-duty trailer connector available
through your dealer. • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in
the underhood electrical center, but the wires
are not connected. They should be connected by
your dealer or a qualified service center.

438
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness The seven-wire harness contains the following
Package trailer circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed*
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
trailer towing harness. This harness with a
seven-pin universal trailer connector is attached to *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in
a bracket on the hitch platform. the underhood electrical center, but the wires
are not connected. They should be connected by
your dealer or a qualified service center.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
press the tow/haul mode button located at the
end of the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle
system voltage and properly charge the battery. If
the trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, you
can turn on the headlamps as a second way to
boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.

439
Electric Brake Control Wiring Trailer Recommendations
Provisions You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
These wiring provisions are included with your Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. CWR is
vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can
provisions are for an electric brake controller. The carry. It doesn’t include the weight of the people
instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the inside. But you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for
data link connector for the trailer brake controller. each seat. The total cargo load must not be
The harness contains the following wires: more than your vehicle’s CWR.
• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so
• Red/Black: Battery that you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you
are using a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch vehicle without the spring bars in place.
• White: Ground You’ll get the best performance if you spread out
It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified the weight of your load the right way, and if
service center. you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
Power Winches For more information, see Towing a Trailer
on page 422.
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle,
only use it when your vehicle is stationary or
anchored.

440
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 444 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 473
Accessories and Modifications ................... 444 Engine Overheating ................................... 473
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 445 Overheated Engine Protection
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 445 Operating Mode ..................................... 476
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Cooling System ......................................... 477
Your Vehicle .......................................... 446 Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 483
Fuel ............................................................. 446 Power Steering Fluid ................................. 484
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 447 Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 485
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 447 Brakes ...................................................... 486
California Fuel ........................................... 447 Battery ...................................................... 490
Additives ................................................... 448 Jump Starting ............................................ 491
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ............................ 449 Rear Axle .................................................... 496
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 450 Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 497
Filling the Tank ......................................... 451
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 455 Front Axle ................................................... 498
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 456 Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 499
Hood Release ........................................... 457 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 502
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 458 Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 502
Engine Oil ................................................. 459 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 462 Back-up Lamps ...................................... 502
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 464 License Plate Lamp ................................... 504
Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 466 Replacement Bulbs ................................... 504
Engine Coolant .......................................... 470

441
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 505 Appearance Care ........................................ 553
Tires ............................................................ 507 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 553
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 508 Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 554
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 512 Leather ...................................................... 555
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 515 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 516 Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 556
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 521 Care of Safety Belts .................................. 556
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 523 Weatherstrips ............................................ 556
Buying New Tires ...................................... 524 Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 557
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 526 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 557
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 527 Finish Care ............................................... 557
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 528 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Wheel Replacement .................................. 528 Blades ................................................... 558
Tire Chains ............................................... 530 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 531 and Trim ................................................ 559
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 532 Tires ......................................................... 560
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 533 Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 560
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing Finish Damage .......................................... 560
the Spare Tire ....................................... 537 Underbody Maintenance ............................ 560
Secondary Latch System ........................... 543 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 561
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 547 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 561
Spare Tire ................................................. 552

442
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification .................................. 562 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 564
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 562 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 565
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 563 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 566
Electrical System ........................................ 563 Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 567
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 563 Capacities and Specifications .................... 572
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 564
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................. 564

443
Service Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
supported service people. aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle
stability control. Some of these accessories may
all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these
even cause malfunction or damage not covered by
marks:
warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your
vehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When you
go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.

444
California Proposition 65 Warning
CAUTION: (Continued)
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of • Be sure you have sufficient
California to cause cancer and birth defects or knowledge, experience, the proper
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, replacement parts, and tools
many parts and systems (including some inside before you attempt any vehicle
the vehicle), many fluids, and some component maintenance task.
wear by-products contain and/or emit these
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
chemicals.
and other fasteners. English and
metric fasteners can be easily
Doing Your Own Service Work confused. If you use the wrong
fasteners, parts can later break or fall
off. You could be hurt.
{CAUTION:
If you want to do some of your own service work,
You can be injured and your vehicle could you should use the proper service manual. It
be damaged if you try to do service work tells you much more about how to service your
on a vehicle without knowing enough vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper
about it. service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 616.
CAUTION: (Continued)

445
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before Fuel
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
page 106. of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
and list the mileage and the date of any service
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
Gasoline.
on page 594.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number
Adding Equipment to the Outside of (VIN) shows the code letter or number that
identifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the
Your Vehicle top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your Identification Number (VIN) on page 562.
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer (VIN Code 0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3),
performance. Check with your dealer before you can use either regular unleaded gasoline or
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol
(E85); also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 449. In all other engines, use only regular
unleaded gasoline.

446
Gasoline Octane California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted If your vehicle is certified to meet California
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
is less than 87, you might notice an audible fuels that meet California specifications. See
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline not available in states adopting California
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine specifications, but emission control system
needs service. performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
Gasoline Specifications fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 253. If this occurs, return to
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
specification D 4814 in the United States or determined that the condition is caused by the type
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
contain an octane-enhancing additive called your warranty.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 448 for additional information.

447
Additives Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
States are now required to contain additives parts in the fuel system and also damage
that will help prevent engine and fuel system plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
deposits from forming, allowing your emission not be covered under your warranty.
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
However, some gasolines contain only the emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to General Motors recommends against the use of
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, the life of spark plugs and the performance of
your dealer has additives that will help correct the emission control system may be affected. The
and prevent most deposit-related problems. malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.

448
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Many service stations will not have an 85%
ethanol fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number Department of Energy has an alternative
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that fuels website (www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/
identifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you
top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle find E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85
Identification Number (VIN) on page 562. should have a label indicating ethanol content. Do
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater
the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), you can use than 85%.
either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel Specification D 5798. By definition, this means
on page 446. In all other engines, use only the that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content
unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline between 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank
Octane on page 447. with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine specifications can affect driveability and could
(Code 0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3) can use cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the
of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your
ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it climate according to ASTM specification D 5798. If
is made from renewable sources such as corn and you have trouble starting on E85, it could be
other crops. because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated
for your climate. If this happens, switching to
gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can
improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel
tank should contain no more than 70% ethanol.

449
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between Fuels in Foreign Countries
gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels, it is
recommended that you add as much fuel as If you plan on driving in another country outside
possible — do not add less than three gallons the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might
(11 L) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
immediately after refueling for at least seven miles any other fuel not recommended in the previous
(11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
in ethanol concentration. improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill the fuel tank more often To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
when using E85 than when you are using gasoline. contact a major oil company that does business
See Filling the Tank on page 451. in the country where you will be driving.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible
with E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle’s fuel
system. Damage caused by additives would
not be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.

450
Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
law in some places. Do not re-enter fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children For vehicles with E85 fuel capability, a yellow cap
away from the fuel pump; never let with the words “E85 or gasoline” will appear.
children pump fuel.

451
 To open the fuel door, push the rearward center
edge inboard and release. The door will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.

452
 Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
{CAUTION: finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
If you spill fuel and then something as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel page 557.
can spray out on you if you open the fuel When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly cap has been left off or improperly installed.
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
unscrew the cap all the way. atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 253.

453
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
(DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be get the right type. Your dealer can get one
displayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed. for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
{CAUTION: your fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 253.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.

454
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the

inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
be maintained until the filling is
is in your vehicle. Static electricity complete.
discharge from the container can ignite • Do not smoke while pumping
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly gasoline.
burned and your vehicle damaged if this • Do not use a cellular phone while
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and pumping gasoline.
others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)

455
Checking Things Under
the Hood {CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
{CAUTION: parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
An electric fan under the hood can start up windshield washer and other fluids, and
and injure you even when the engine is not plastic or rubber. You or others could be
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
away from any underhood electric fan. things that will burn onto a hot engine.

456
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It
is located inside
the vehicle to
the lower left of the
steering wheel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate

the secondary hood release, near the center
of the grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler
caps are on properly. Then bring the hood
from full open to within 6 inches (152 mm)
from the closed position, pause, then push the
front center of the hood with a swift, firm
motion to fully close the hood.

457
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.8L and 6.0L similar), here is what you will see:

458
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Cleaner/Filter on page 464. Fluid” under Brakes on page 486.
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). M. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 464. Block on page 567.
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
See Cooling System on page 477 and Coolant “Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 473. Washer Fluid on page 485.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 491. Engine Oil
E. Battery. See Battery on page 490. If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message in the Driver
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Information Center (DIC) comes on, check the
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 459. engine oil level right away. For more information,
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See see CHECK OIL LEVEL under DIC Warnings and
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Messages on page 270. You should check the
Transmission Fluid on page 466. engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View). Checking Engine Oil
See Jump Starting on page 491.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
page 459.
on level ground.
J. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 477.
K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 484.

459
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 has so much oil that the oil level gets above
for the location of the engine oil dipstick. the cross-hatched area that shows the
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil proper operating range, the engine could be
several minutes to drain back into the oil damaged.
pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might See Engine
not show the actual level. Compartment Overview
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper on page 458 for the
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the location of the engine oil
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, fill cap.
and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level

somewhere in the proper operating range. Push
the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, you need to add at least one
quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 572.
460
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This
symbol indicates that
the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, and

use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Look for three things:
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
• GM6094M meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM the American Petroleum Institute Certified For
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to
an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. use the recommended oil can result in engine
• SAE 5W-30 damage not covered by your warranty.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
best for your vehicle. for your vehicle.

461
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the When the system has calculated that oil life has
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide message will come on. See DIC Warnings
easier cold starting and better protection for and Messages on page 270. Change your oil as
the engine at extremely low temperatures. soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
Engine Oil Additives under the best conditions, the oil life system may
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM over a year. However, your engine oil and
Standard GM6094M are all you need for good filter must be changed at least once a year and at
performance and engine protection. this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained service people who will perform
this work using genuine GM parts and reset
Engine Oil Life System the system. It is also important to check your oil
When to Change Engine Oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
know when to change the engine oil and filter. since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
This is based on engine revolutions and engine oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.

462
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
System comes back on when you start your vehicle, the
Engine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeat
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to the procedure.
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the What to Do with Used Oil
system so it can calculate when the next oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that
change is required. If a situation occurs where you may be unhealthy for your skin and could
change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
OIL SOON message coming on, reset the system. your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
the Engine Oil Life System, do the following: containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
products.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access this Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
display. See DIC Operation and Displays (With change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
DIC Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
page 267. sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of
the DIC, or the trip odometer reset stem if your
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a
vehicle does not have DIC buttons, for more
local recycling center for help.
than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.

463
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
See Engine
Compartment Overview If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator,
on page 458 for the it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filter
location of the engine air needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction
cleaner/filter and the indicator, you should inspect the air filter
air filter restriction restriction indicator at every oil change and
indicator, if the vehicle replace the engine air cleaner/filter when the
has one. indicator tells you to.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.

464
How to Inspect the Engine Air Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Cleaner/Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction Indicator
Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the
engine air cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator
turns black or is in the red/orange “change” zone,
replace the filter and reset the indicator. See the
steps following to replace the engine air cleaner/
filter and to reset the air filter restriction indicator.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine
air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following
Steps 1 through 6. When you have the engine air
cleaner/filter removed, lightly shake it to release
loose dust and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter 1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly. See
remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. Engine Compartment Overview on page 458.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the
housing and lift up the cover.

465
 {CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible. Automatic Transmission Fluid
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing
surfaces and the housing. When to Check and Change Automatic
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Transmission Fluid
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. A good time to check your automatic transmission
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if
the vehicle has one, by pressing the top button Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
on the indicator. Additional Required Services on page 582, and
be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590.

466
How to Check Automatic Transmission To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
Fluid normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
may choose to have this done at the dealership 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
service department. above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine
instructions here, or you could get a false reading temperature gage moves and then remains steady
on the dipstick. for 10 minutes.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
damage your transmission. Too much can has been sitting for eight hours or more with
mean that some of the fluid could come out the engine off, but this is used only as a reference.
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle
get an accurate reading if you check your the engine longer. Should the fluid level be
transmission fluid. low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
will give you a more accurate reading of the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
fluid level.
• When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.

467
Checking the Fluid Level See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458
for more information on location.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
engine running.
paper towel.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
lever in PARK (P).
and then pull it back out again.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:

The transmission
dipstick handle with this
graphic is located at 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
the rear of the engine lower level. The fluid level must be in the
compartment, on COLD area, below the cross-hatched area, for
the passenger’s side of a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched
the vehicle. area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the
dipstick pointed down to get an accurate
reading.

468
 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
push the dipstick back in all the way; then transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
flip the handle down to lock the dipstick and the damages may not be covered by
in place. your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Consistency of Readings Fluids and Lubricants on page 590.
Always check the fluid level at least twice using • After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
the procedure described previously. Consistency described under “How to Check Automatic
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
proper fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent,
contact your dealer. • When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the
How to Add Automatic Transmission handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission
dipstick tube only after checking the transmission
fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only
as a reference. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to
the HOT area for a hot check. It does not take
much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do
not overfill.

469
Engine Coolant A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with • Give freezing protection down to
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
−34°F (−37°C).
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended • Protect against rust and corrosion.
life coolant.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
The following explains your cooling system and
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
should.
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 473. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at the
first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.

470
What to Use Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will covered by your warranty. Too much water
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
mixture, you do not need to add anything else. radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
{CAUTION: year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Adding only plain water to your cooling Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
some other liquid such as alcohol, can could damage your vehicle. Use only the
boil before the proper coolant mixture will. proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is this manual for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
page 590 for more information.
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

471
Checking Coolant Adding Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine If you need more coolant, add the proper
compartment on the passenger’s side of the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on but only when the engine is cool.
page 458 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when hot engine parts. Coolant contains
the engine and radiator are hot can allow ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
steam and scalding liquids to blow out engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge coolant on a hot engine.
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot. When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD mark.

472
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Engine Overheating
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
installed, coolant loss and possible engine vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly Temperature Gage on page 252.
and tightly secured. In addition, you will find an ENGINE
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, ENGINE
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and an ENGINE
Compartment Overview on page 458 for more POWER IS REDUCED message in the Driver
information on location. Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270.

473
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: See Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode on page 476 for
Steam from an overheated engine can information on driving to a safe place in
burn you badly, even if you just open the an emergency.
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from the Notice: If your engine catches fire because
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
there is no sign of steam or coolant
would not be covered by your warranty. See
before you open the hood. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
If you keep driving when the vehicles on page 476 for information on driving to a
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can safe place in an emergency.
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
CAUTION: (Continued)

474
If No Steam Is Coming From Your If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
Engine ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE message with no sign of steam, try this
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or for a minute or so:
the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE 1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn
message, along with a low coolant condition, can it off.
indicate a serious problem.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or fan speed and open the windows as
hear no steam, the problem may not be too necessary.
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you: 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to do
• Climb a long hill on a hot day. so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) or
• Stop after high-speed driving. NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
• Idle for long periods in traffic. If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
page 422. about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle immediately.

475
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is Overheated Engine Protection
equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan,
push down the accelerator until the engine speed Operating Mode
is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for If an overheated engine condition exists and the
at least five minutes while you are parked. REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is displayed, an overheat protection mode which
equipped with an electric cooling fan, idle the alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine for five minutes while you are parked. engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a
loss in power and engine performance. This
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine
miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat
Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
protection mode should be avoided.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life
system. See Engine Oil on page 459.

476
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is {CAUTION:
what you will see:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is

boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If possible, the vehicle should be parked on a
level surface. Check the coolant level after
the system cools down. Some amount of coolant
may be lost due to overheating.

5.3L Engine (4.8L and 6.0L Similar)

A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)

477
 {CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.

The coolant level should be at or above the FULL

COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.

478
Notice: Engine damage from running your How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
engine without coolant is not covered by your Surge Tank
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 476 for information on If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
driving to a safe place in an emergency. if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the
may cause premature engine, heater core, or FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
coolant could require changing sooner, at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
be covered by your warranty. Always use Coolant on page 470 for more information.
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.

479
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot some other liquid such as alcohol, can
cooling system can blow out and burn boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
you badly. They are under pressure, and if Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure set for the proper coolant mixture. With
cap — even a little — they can come out at plain water or the wrong mixture, your
high speed. Never turn the cap when the engine could get too hot but you would
cooling system, including the coolant not get the overheat warning. Your engine
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for could catch fire and you or others could
the cooling system and coolant surge be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
to turn the pressure cap.

480
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and 1. You can remove the
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and coolant surge tank
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and pressure cap
the proper coolant mixture. when the cooling
system, including
the coolant
{CAUTION: surge tank pressure
cap and upper
You can be burned if you spill coolant on radiator hose, is no
hot engine parts. Coolant contains longer hot.
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
coolant on a hot engine. about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. A hiss means there is
still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.

481
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark. start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch
out for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level
is lower, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.

482
 5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the You may also hear this fan noise when you start
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off partially disengages.
and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat If your vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may
coolant fill procedure steps 1 through 6. hear the fans spinning at low speed during most
everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling
Engine Fan Noise is required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, or if you
If your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, are operating your air conditioning system, the fans
when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins may change to high speed and you may hear an
faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In increase in fan noise. This is normal and indicates
most everyday driving conditions, the fan is that the cooling system is functioning properly. The
spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. fans will change to low speed when additional
This improves fuel economy and reduces fan cooling is no longer required.
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages, so you
may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is
merely the cooling system functioning properly.
The fan will slow down when additional cooling is
not required and the clutch disengages.

483
Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
See Engine
Compartment Overview 1. Turn the key off and let the engine
on page 458 for compartment cool down.
reservoir location. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir
clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
It is not necessary to regularly check power up to the mark.
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A What to Use
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Have the system inspected and repaired.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.

484
Windshield Washer Fluid Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
What to Use Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure Engine Compartment
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before Overview on page 458
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area for reservoir location.
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against Notice:
freezing. • When using concentrated washer fluid,
Adding Washer Fluid follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message in
the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
is low. The message is displayed for 15 seconds fluid. Water can cause the solution to
at the start of each ignition cycle. When the freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message is and other parts of the washer system.
displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to the Also, water does not clean as well
windshield washer fluid reservoir. as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

485
Brakes There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
Brake Fluid is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
Your brake master new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
cylinder reservoir is up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
filled with DOT-3 brake the brake system. If it is, you should have your
fluid. See Engine brake system fixed, since a leak means that
Compartment Overview sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or
on page 458 for the will not work at all.
location of the reservoir. So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will
have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.

486
 Checking Brake Fluid
{CAUTION: You can check the brake fluid without taking off
the cap.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can
Look at the brake fluid
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
reservoir. The fluid level
the engine is hot enough. You or others should be above
could be burned, and your vehicle could MIN. If it is not, have
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when your brake system
work is done on the brake hydraulic checked to see if there
system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in is a leak.
this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake

warning light will come on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 249.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
when to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled make sure the level is above the MIN but not
Maintenance on page 579. over the MAX mark.

487
What to Add Notice:
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed brake system parts. For example, just a
container only. See Recommended Fluids few drops of mineral-based oil, such
and Lubricants on page 590. as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the they will have to be replaced. Do not
area around the cap before removing it. This let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
{CAUTION: be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake on page 557.
system, the brakes may not work well.
This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.

488
Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. or lightly applied. This does not mean something
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that is wrong with your brakes.
make a high-pitched warning sound when the Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
The sound may come and go or be heard all inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
{CAUTION: complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
soon the brakes will not work well. That
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
could lead to an accident. When you hear in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake
the brake wear warning sound, have your trouble.
vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out Every time you make a brake stop, your disc
brake pads could result in costly brake repair. brakes adjust for wear.

489
Replacing Brake System Parts Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its chemicals known to the State of California
many parts have to be of top quality and work well to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
together if the vehicle is to have really good hands after handling.
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with
top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts Vehicle Storage
of your braking system — for example, when your
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
brake linings wear down and you need new ones
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
put in — be sure you get new approved GM
cable from the battery. This will help keep the
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
battery from running down.
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance {CAUTION:
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement Batteries have acid that can burn you and
brake parts. gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Battery Starting on page 491 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 458 for battery location.

490
Jump Starting Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run your vehicle.
down, you may want to use another vehicle and
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
to use the following steps to do it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
{CAUTION: both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
Batteries can hurt you. They can be grounds to jump start your vehicle.
dangerous because: 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
• They contain acid that can burn you. cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
• They contain gas that can explode or not touching each other. If they are, it could
ignite. cause a ground connection you do not
• They contain enough electricity to want. You would not be able to start your
burn you. vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in the automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
costly damage to your vehicle that would manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
not be covered by your warranty. setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.

491
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
turn off your radio and other accessories when
jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets.
Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate
the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal
locations on that vehicle. The remote negative (-) terminal is a stud located
on the right front of the engine, where the
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
negative battery cable attaches.
starting terminal and a remote negative (−)
jump starting terminal. You should always use See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458
these remote terminals instead of the for more information on the location of the
terminals on the battery. remote positive (+) and remote negative (-)
The remote positive (+) terminal, if equipped, is terminals.
located under a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.

492
 CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
An electric fan can start up even when the add water to take care of that first. If you
engine is not running and can injure you. do not, explosive gas could be present.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
{CAUTION: medical help immediately.

Using a match near a battery can cause

battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
{CAUTION:
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more
Fans or other moving engine parts can
light.
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
Be sure the battery has enough water. You from moving parts once the engine is
do not need to add water to the battery running.
installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
CAUTION: (Continued) loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
493
 Before you connect the cables, here are some 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
basic things you should know. Positive (+) it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
will go to positive (+) or to a remote battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. the vehicle has one.
Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
terminal if the vehicle has one. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or vehicle has one.
you will get a short that would damage Do not let the other end touch anything until
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do the next step. The other end of the
not connect the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
because this can cause sparks. metal engine part or to the remote negative (−)
6. Connect the red terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.
positive (+) cable to
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
the positive (+)
cable to the remote negative (−) terminal,
terminal of the
on the vehicle with the dead battery.
vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
remote positive (+) and run the engine for a while.
terminal if the vehicle 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
has one. battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.

494
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting vehicles do the following:
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
would not be covered by your warranty. Always the vehicle that had the bad battery.
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
not touch each other or other metal. the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover,
if equipped, to its original position.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
495
Rear Axle How to Check Lubricant
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid
during production. They are not filled to reach
a certain level. When checking the fluid level on
any axle, variations in the readings can be caused
by factory fill differences between the minimum
and the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle
has just been driven before checking the fluid
level, it may appear lower than normal because To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has on a level surface.
not drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a • For 4.8L and 5.3L engines, the proper level is
reading taken five minutes after the vehicle from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm to
has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug
level than a vehicle that has been stationary hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough
for an hour or two. Remember that the rear axle fluid to reach the proper level.
assembly must be supported to get a true reading.

496
 • For 6.0L engines, the proper level is from How to Check Lubricant
0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the
rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.
• The proper fill level for the 2500 Series is from
0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of
the filler plug hole, located at the front of the
axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.

Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to
these vehicles. There are two additional systems
that need lubrication. Automatic Transfer Case
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
Transfer Case on a level surface.
When to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak, or you lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 579.

497
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 590.

Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
A: Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface. B: Drain Plug
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant:
• When the differential is cold, add enough
lubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating
temperature (warm), add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
498
What to Use The vehicle should be properly prepared as
follows:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended • The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps
Fluids and Lubricants on page 590. are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
Headlamp Aiming surface which is level all the way to the wall.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming perpendicular to the wall.
system. The aim of the headlamps have been • The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or
preset at the factory and should need no further mud on it.
adjustment. • The vehicle should be fully assembled and all
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident, other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
the aim of the headlamps may be affected and being performed.
adjustment may be necessary. • The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs
you, this may mean the vertical aim of your (75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.
headlamps needs to be adjusted. • Tires should be properly inflated.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your • The spare tire is in its proper location in the
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need vehicle.
to be adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s
headlamps as described in the following low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps
procedure. will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps
are aimed properly.

499
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 457 for more information.

4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from

the ground upward (A) to the recorded
distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall
or flat surface the width of the vehicle at the
height of the mark in Step 4.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve
low-beam headlamp. beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record which may cause damage to the headlamp.
the distance. 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows
only the beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

500
 9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the
which are under the hood near each headlamp right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
assembly. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
The adjustment screw can be turned with a headlamp.
E8 Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle
of the beam.

501
Bulb Replacement Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see and Back-up Lamps
Replacement Bulbs on page 504. A. Taillamp/Stoplamp
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this B. Back-up Lamp
section, contact your dealer. C. Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp
Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.

502
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 4. Press the release tab, if bulb socket has one,
and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate on remove it from the taillamp assembly.
page 127 for more information.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb
2. Remove the two socket.
screws from the
taillamp assembly. 6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and
insert it into the taillamp assembly. Turn the
bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp
assembly until it clicks.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. When
reinstalling, make sure to line up the pins on
the taillamp assembly with the vehicle. If
you do not do this, you will not be able
correctly install the taillamp assembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you

disengage the inner pins on the taillamp
assembly from the vehicle.

503
License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-up Lamp 3047
License Plate Lamp 168
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp,
and Stoplamp 3047

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact

1. Remove the two screws holding each of the your dealer/retailer.
license plate lamps to the molding that is part
of the liftgate.
2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the molding opening.

504
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 579.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the
wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector
from the windshield.
and make sure the grooved areas are fully set
in the locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 592.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of

the blade, and rotate the blade assembly
away from the arm connector.

505
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out
of the park rest position.

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park
rest position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should
be used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull it
off of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in
position and push the blade away from
the wiper arm.

506
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever Tire pressure should be checked
have questions about your tire warranty and where
when your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for
details. For additional information refer to the tire Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515.
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle. • Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
{CAUTION: pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
Poorly maintained and improperly used
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
tires are dangerous.
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can replace them.
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See 20-Inch Tires
Loading Your Vehicle on page 407.
• Underinflated tires pose the same If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch
danger as overloaded tires. The P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified as
resulting accident could cause serious touring tires and are designed for on road use. The
injury. Check all tires frequently to low-profile, wide tread design is not recommended
maintain the recommended pressure. for off-road driving. See Off-Road Driving on
page 372, for additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)

507
Tire Sidewall Labeling (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
Useful information about a tire is molded into the tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall. illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

508
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 527. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
Maximum load that can be carried and the of letters and numbers used to define a particular
maximum pressure needed to support that load. tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
For information on recommended tire pressure see type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 and illustration later in this section for more detail.
Loading Your Vehicle on page 407.

509
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria (E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
Specification): Original equipment tires designed and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
federal safety guidelines. onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure (F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
needed to support that load when used in a dual number of plies in the sidewall and under the
configuration. For information on recommended tread.
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407. (G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The needed to support that load when used as a
Department of Transportation (DOT) code single. For information on recommended
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407.
Safety Standards.

510
Tire Size (A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
The following examples show the different parts of letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size
a tire size. means a light truck tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to
sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States inches.
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a (F) Service Description: The service description
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed
ratings range from A to Z.

511
Tire Terminology and Definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
pressing outward on each square inch of the heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds on page 515.
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
Accessory Weight: This means the combined vehicle with standard and optional equipment
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
optional accessories are, automatic transmission, coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
to its width. motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
located between the plies and the tread. Cords the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
may be made from steel or other reinforcing and date of production.
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped Loading Your Vehicle on page 407.
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407.
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.

512
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407. occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of on page 407.
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
vehicles. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying and/or model name molding that is higher
capacity of a tire. or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
The maximum air pressure is molded onto passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
the sidewall. multipurpose vehicles.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
for that tire. pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of Your Vehicle on page 407.
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.

513
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at Standards): A tire information system that
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which determined by tire manufacturers using
the tire beads are seated. government testing procedures. The ratings are
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
and the bead. Tire Quality Grading on page 527.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
which a tire can operate. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 407.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
called wear bars, that show across the tread of and the original equipment tire size and
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on Loading Information Label” under Loading
page 523. Your Vehicle on page 407.

514
Inflation - Tire Pressure A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to driver’s door lock post (striker). This label lists your
operate effectively. vehicle’s original equipment tires and their
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that recommended cold tire inflation pressures. The
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on
not. If your tires do not have enough air the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure
(under-inflation), you can get the following: needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load
carrying capacity.
• Too much flexing
For additional information regarding how much
• Too much heat weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
• Tire overloading the tire and loading information label, see Loading
• Premature or irregular wear Your Vehicle on page 407.
• Poor handling When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. For additional
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
information regarding the spare tire, see Spare Tire
you can get the following:
on page 552.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

515
How to Check Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may levels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensors
look properly inflated even when they’re are mounted on each tire and wheel assembly,
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure except the spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitor
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires and
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). located in the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a low
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has the
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver may also
inflation pressure matches the recommended check tire pressure levels using the DIC.
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the When a low tire pressure condition is detected,
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure
recommended amount. warning symbol located on the instrument panel
cluster. If your vehicle has the DIC feature, a
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on message to check the pressure in a specific tire
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. will also appear on the DIC display. The low
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve panel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt warning message on the DIC display will appear at
and moisture. each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to
the correct inflation pressure.

516
For additional information and details about the As an added safety
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and feature, your vehicle has
Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 261 or DIC been equipped with a
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) tire pressure monitoring
on page 267 and DIC Warnings and Messages on system (TPMS) that
page 270. illuminates a low tire
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions, pressure telltale when
that the tire pressure monitor light, located on one or more of your tires
the instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE is significantly
PRESSURE message will appear when the under-inflated.
vehicle is first started and then turn off as you
start to drive the vehicle. This could be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
need to be inflated to the proper pressure. illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
a different size than the size indicated on the affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
should determine the proper tire inflation proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
pressure for those tires.) responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

517
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message
malfunction indicator to indicate when the and low tire pressure light (telltale) will come
system is not operating properly. The TPMS on each time the vehicle is started until the tires
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
pressure telltale. When the system detects a The Tire and Loading Information label (tire
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately information placard) shows the size of your
one minute and then remain continuously vehicle’s original tires and the correct inflation
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
malfunction exists. page 515. For the location of the tire and loading
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
system may not be able to detect or signal low on page 407.
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low
occur for a variety of reasons, including the tire pressure condition but it does not replace
installation of replacement or alternate tires or normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from Rotation on page 521 and Tires on page 507.
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
the TPMS to continue to function properly. sensors.

518
Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined
below:
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or 1. Set the parking brake.
replace one or more of the TPMS sensors, 2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the
the identification codes will need to be matched to engine off.
the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following 3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle information
order: driver’s side front tire, passengers side button until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
front tire, passengers side rear tire, and driver’s message displays. If your vehicle does not
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. have the DIC buttons, press the trip odometer
See your GM dealer for service. reset stem located on the instrument panel
cluster until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each message displays.
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s 4. If your vehicle has the DIC buttons, press the
air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation set/reset button. The horn will sound twice to
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall. indicate the TPMS receiver is ready, and
the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message will
You will have two minutes to match the first display. If your vehicle does not have the DIC
tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to buttons, press and hold the trip odometer
match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer reset stem until the horn chirps twice and the
than two minutes, to match the first tire and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message is
wheel, or more than five minutes to match all four displayed.
tire and wheel positions the matching process
stops and you will need to start over.

519
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire. 9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap repeat the procedure in Step 6.
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by 10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure driver’s side rear tire, the horn chirp will sound
for five seconds, or until a horn chirp two more times to signal the tire learning
sounds. The horn chirp, which make take up mode is no longer active. Turn the ignition
to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that the switch to LOCK.
sensor identification code has been matched 11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
to this tire and wheel position. To decrease pressure level as indicated on the Tire
air-pressure out of a tire you can use the and Loading Information label.
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gage, or a key. 12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
repeat the procedure in Step 6. If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,
the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and displayed on the DIC screen. This message should
repeat the procedure in Step 6. go off once you re-install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.

520
Federal Communications Commission Tire Inspection and Rotation
(FCC) and Industry and Science Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
Canada (8 000 to 13 000 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
operates on a radio frequency and complies with tires as soon as possible and check wheel
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
to the following two conditions: See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 523
1. This device may not cause harmful and Wheel Replacement on page 528 for
interference. more information.
2. This device must accept any interference Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
received, including interference that may pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
cause undesired operation. moves, use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the
cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
Operation is subject to the following two first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
conditions: Maintenance on page 579.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
521
 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 572.

{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the come off and cause an accident. When
correct rotation pattern shown here. you change a wheel, remove any rust or
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
tire and loading information label. See Loading
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
Your Vehicle on page 407 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 515, for more information. off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) will need to have the TPMS
sensors reset after a tire rotation. See “TPMS
Sensor Identification Codes” under Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 516.

522
When It Is Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
One way to tell when it • You can see the indicators at three or more
is time for new tires is places around the tire.
to check the treadwear • You can see cord or fabric showing through
indicators, which will the tire’s rubber.
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
(1.6 mm) or less of tread snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
remaining. Some • The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
commercial truck tires
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
may not have treadwear
that cannot be repaired well because of the
indicators.
size or location of the damage.

523
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for {CAUTION:
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were Mixing tires could cause you to lose
designed to meet General Motors Tire control while driving. If you mix tires of
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec) different sizes, brands, or types (radial
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
strongly recommends that you get tires with handle properly, and you could have a
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety, brands or types may also cause damage
during normal use, as the original tires. to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size, brand, and type tires on all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the Your vehicle may have a different size
overall performance of your vehicle, including spare than the road tires (those originally
brake system performance, ride and handling, installed on your vehicle). When new, your
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded assembly with a similar overall diameter
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer. as your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,
If the tires have an all-season tread design, so it is all right to drive on it. Because
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS this spare was developed for use on your
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
vehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.
on page 508 for additional information.

524
 Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
{CAUTION: warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
the wheel rim flanges could develop lower than the proper warning level you would
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing Monitor System on page 516.
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
wheels on your vehicle. on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407,
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those for more information about the Tire and Loading
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

525
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size {CAUTION:
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs, If you add different sized wheels, your
including its braking, ride and handling vehicle may not provide an acceptable
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. level of performance and safety if tires not
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic recommended for those wheels are
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, selected. You may increase the chance
and electronic stability control, the performance
that you will crash and suffer serious
of these systems can be affected.
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 524 and

Accessories and Modifications on page 444 for
additional information.

526
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
maximum section width. For example: under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
The following information relates to the system as well on the government course as a tire
developed by the United States National Highway graded 100. The relative performance of tires
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and however, and may depart significantly from
temperature performance. This applies only to the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are practices, and differences in road characteristics
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car and climate.
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) Traction – AA, A, B, C
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
limited-production tires. under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
While the tires available on General Motors A tire marked C may have poor traction
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with performance.
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) is based on straight-ahead braking traction
standards. tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

527
Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate the longest tire life and best overall performance.
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
high temperature can cause the material of the tire However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
which all passenger car tires must meet under road, your tires and wheels may need to be
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels diagnosis.
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Wheel Replacement
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
underinflation, or excessive loading, either loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
separately or in combination, can cause heat nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
buildup and possible tire failure. replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.

528
Each new wheel should have the same Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
be mounted the same way as the one it speedometer or odometer calibration,
replaces. headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with to the body and chassis.
new GM original equipment parts. This way, you See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532 for more
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel information.
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
can be dangerous. It could affect the dangerous. You cannot know how it has
braking and handling of your vehicle, been used or how far it has been driven. It
make your tires lose air and make you could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
lose control. You could have a collision in you have to replace a wheel, use a new
which you or others could be injured. GM original equipment wheel.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.

529
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
P275/55R20 size tires, do not use tire do not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
chains. They can damage your vehicle If you do find traction devices that will fit,
because there is not enough clearance. install them on the rear tires.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
Notice: If your vehicle has P265/70R17 size
damage to the brakes, suspension, or
tires, use tire chains only where legal and only
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by when you must. Use chains that are the proper
the tire chains could cause you to lose size for your vehicle’s tires. Install them on the
control of your vehicle and you or others rear tires only.
may be injured in a crash.
Do not use chains on the front tires.
Use another type of traction device only if Tighten them as tightly as possible with the
its manufacturer recommends it for use ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
on your vehicle and tire size combination the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
and road conditions. Follow that can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,
manufacturer’s instructions. stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving
CAUTION: (Continued)
too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on
will damage your vehicle.

530
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are {CAUTION:
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you maintenance or repairs is dangerous
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips without the appropriate safety equipment
about what to expect and what to do: and training. The jack provided with your
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag vehicle is designed only for changing a
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the or others could be badly injured or killed
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out jack provided with your vehicle only for
of the traffic lane. changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.

531
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
your hazard warning flashers. See Hazard be sure the transfer case is in a drive
Warning Flashers on page 204 for more gear— not in NEUTRAL.
information.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
{CAUTION: 5. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The 6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over rear of the tire farthest away from the
or fall on you or other people. You and one being changed. That would be
they could be badly injured or even killed. the tire on the other side, at the
Find a level place to change your tire. To opposite end of the vehicle.
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)

532
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks. The equipment you will need to change a flat
tire is stored under the storage tray, which
is located on the driver’s side trim panel (over the
rear wheelhouse).

The following information will tell you how to use

the jack and change a tire.
Regular Wheelbase shown, Extended Wheelbase
similar.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling
up on the finger depression under the jack
symbol.

533
2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the The tools you will be using include the following:
tool bag by turning it counterclockwise. A. Jack D. Jack Handle
3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack B. Wheel Blocks Extensions
counterclockwise to release the jack and C. Jack Handle E. Wheel Wrench
wheel blocks from the bracket.
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel
block retainer by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.

534
To access the spare tire, refer to the following 1. Open the hoist shaft access door (C) on the
graphics and instructions: bumper to access the spare tire lock (K).
2. Insert the ignition key, turn it clockwise and
then pull it to remove the spare tire lock.

3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D)

and wheel wrench (E) as shown.
A. Hoist Assembly G. Tire Retainer
B. Hoist Shaft H. Spare Tire
C. Hoist Shaft (Valve Stem
Access Pointed Down)
Cover/Hole I. Hoist Shaft
D. Jack Handle Access Hole
Extensions J. Hoist End of
E. Wheel Wrench Extension Tool
F. Hoist Cable K. Spare Tire Lock

535
 4. Insert the open end 6. Use the wheel
of the extension (J) wrench hook that
through the hole allows you to
in the rear pull the hoist cable
bumper (I) (hoist towards you, to
shaft access hole). assist in reaching
the spare tire.

Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)

7. Tilt the tire
connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed
retainer (G) at the
square end of the extension is used to lower
end of the cable
the spare tire.
when the tire
5. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise has been lowered,
to lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. so it can be
Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the pulled up through
spare tire can be pulled out from under the wheel opening.
the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing
the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch 8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
System on page 543 for more information.

536
Removing the Flat Tire and If the wheel has bolt-on wheel covers, loosen
the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel
Installing the Spare Tire wrench counterclockwise. If needed, finish
Use the following pictures and instructions to loosening them by hand. The nut caps will not
remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle. come off. Using the flat end of the wheel
wrench, pry along the edge of the cover until
it comes off.

1. Remove the center cap, if your vehicle has

one, by placing the chisel end of the wheel
wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry 2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
the cap out. nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove
the wheel nuts yet.

537
 {CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position Raising your vehicle with the jack
B. Rear Position improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.

3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.

538
 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to clear the ground.

Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire
of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack
handle and only one jack handle extension.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle Rear Position – 1500 Models
extension. Attach the jack handle to the
jack (A). Position the jack on the frame behind
the flat tire where the frame sections overlap.

539
 Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so
there is enough room for the spare tire to clear
the ground.
4. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.

Rear Position – All Other Models 5. Take off the flat tire.
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear
tire of the vehicle, you will need to use
the jack handle (B) and both jack handle
extensions (C). Attach the wheel wrench (D) to
the jack handle extensions (C). Attach the jack
handle (B) to the jack (A). Use the jacking pad
provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle.

540
 6. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
{CAUTION: bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts wheel.
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time. The
wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use {CAUTION:
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off. Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.

7. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded

end of the nuts toward the wheel after
mounting the spare tire.

541
8. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
wheel is held against the hub. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
9. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely. and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 572 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 10. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross
the proper torque specification. See sequence as shown by turning the wheel
Capacities and Specifications on page 572 wrench clockwise.
for wheel nut torque specification.

542
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you
must also reinstall the either the center cap, or
bolt-on hub cap, depending on what your vehicle {CAUTION:
has. For center caps, place the cap on the
wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with Before beginning this procedure read all
the wheel. The cap only goes on one way. Be the instructions. Failure to read and follow
sure to line up the tab on the center cap with the the instructions could damage the hoist
indentation on the wheel. For bolt-on hub caps, assembly and you and others could get
align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and hurt. Read and follow the instructions
then tighten by hand. Then use the wheel listed next.
wrench to tighten.

Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist 1. Check under the
assembly which has a secondary latch system. vehicle to see if the
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly cable end is
falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch visible. If the cable
to work, the spare tire must be installed with is not visible,
the valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat proceed to Step 6.
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 547.

543
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by 7. Place the bottom
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you edge of the jack (A)
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You on the wheel
cannot overtighten the cable. blocks (B),
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench separating them so
counterclockwise three or four turns. that the jack is
balanced securely.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If
the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue
with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools on page 533.
5. If the spare tire does not lower, turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise until approximately
6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,
with the backs facing each other.

544
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel 9. Position the center lift point of the jack under
wrench to the jack and place it (with the the center of the spare tire.
wheel blocks) under the vehicle toward the 10. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
front of the rear bumper. jack until it lifts the end fitting.

545
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire 13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
stops moving upward and is held firmly in carefully remove the jack with the other hand.
place so that the secondary latch has released 14. Use one hand to push against the spare while
and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. firmly pulling the jack out from under the
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench spare tire with the other hand. If the spare tire
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack is hanging from the cable, insert the hoist
until the spare tire slides off the jack or end of the extension, and wheel wrench into
is hanging by the cable. the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and
turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire the rest of the way.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If
the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from under the spare.

546
 15. Tilt the tire retainer Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
at the end of the
cable and pull Tools
it through the wheel
opening. Pull the
tire out from {CAUTION:
under the vehicle.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
16. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole strike someone. Store all these in the
in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable proper place.
back up if the cable is hanging under
the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat
you can. You will not be able to store a spare or tire under your vehicle for an extended
flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has period of time or with the valve stem pointing
been replaced. up may damage the wheel. Always stow
the wheel with the valve stem pointing down
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon
the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on as possible.
page 537.

547
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the H. Spare Tire/Flat J. Hoist End of
spare tire carrier. Refer to the following graphics Tire (Valve Stem Extension Tool
and instructions to help you: Pointed Down) K. Spare Tire Lock
I. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of
the vehicle with the valve stem pointed
down, and to the rear.

A. Hoist Assembly D. Jack Handle

B. Hoist Shaft Extensions
C. Hoist Shaft E. Wheel Wrench
Access F. Hoist Cable
Cover/Hole G. Tire Retainer

548
 2. Tilt the retainer 4. Insert the open end
downward and of the extension (J)
through the wheel through the hole
opening. Make in the rear
sure the retainer is bumper (I) (hoist
fully seated shaft access hole).
across the underside
of the wheel.

5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the

retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it
skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.

3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D)

and wheel wrench (E) as shown.

549
 To store the tools, do the following.

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,

pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the A. Wheel Blocks E. Jack
tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten B. Tool Bag with F. Wing Nut
the cable. Jack Tools Retaining Wheel
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock. C. Retaining Blocks
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover. Bracket G. Wing Nut
D. Wing Nut on Jack
Retaining
Tool Bag
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle,
and jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).

550
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E)
together with the wing nut (F).
3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in
the driver’s side trim panel over the
wheelhouse.
4. Turn the wing nut (G) clockwise until the jack
is secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be
sure to position the holes in the base of
the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool
bag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D)
clockwise to secure.

6. Return the storage tray to its original stored

position.

551
Spare Tire Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tires originally installed on your
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on
tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its your vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the different
Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on size spare tire is installed, keep the vehicle in
page 407 for information regarding proper tire two-wheel drive.
inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on
how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire should stop as soon as possible and make
on page 537 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. Have the
Tools on page 547. damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be available
and the different size spare tire is installed on in case you need it again.
your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
drive until you can have your flat tire repaired because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and
and/or replaced. You could damage your its wheel together. If your vehicle has a spare
vehicle, and the repair costs would not be tire that does not match your vehicle’s original road
covered by your warranty. Never use tires and wheels in size and type, do not include
four-wheel drive when the different size spare the spare in the tire rotation.
tire is installed on your vehicle.

552
Appearance Care When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
recommended to remove particles from your cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of and glass cleaner.
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
garments that transfer color to your home all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
furnishings may also transfer color to your your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
vehicle’s interior. ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

553
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your • Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you cleaning.
can also obtain a product from your dealer to • Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery. from the use of many organic solvents such
Do not clean your vehicle using the following as naptha, alcohol, etc.
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to Fabric/Carpet
remove a soil from any interior surface.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces. dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
heavy pressure can damage your interior and them first with plain water or club soda. Before
does not improve the effectiveness of soil cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
removal. as possible using one of the following techniques:
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave the paper towel until no more can be
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. removed.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per • For solid dry soils: remove as much as
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. possible and then vacuum.

554
To clean, use the following instructions: Leather
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
water or club soda.
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning, naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
using a clean area of the cloth each time it to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
becomes soiled. removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the and protect leather may permanently change
cleaning cloth remains clean. the appearance and feel of your leather and are
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a not recommended. Do not use silicone or
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning wax-based products, or those containing organic
process that was used with plain water. solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric they can alter the appearance by increasing
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be shoe polish on your leather.
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.

555
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Care of Safety Belts
Plastic Surfaces Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a {CAUTION:
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and do, it may severely weaken them. In a
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect crash, they might not be able to provide
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the adequate protection. Clean safety belts
appearance and feel of your interior and are only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing Weatherstrips
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
Some commercial products may increase gloss on last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield very cold, damp weather frequent application may
and even make it difficult to see through the be required. See Recommended Fluids and
windshield under certain conditions. Lubricants on page 590.

556
Washing Your Vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability. a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm Your Vehicle on page 557.
or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
Finish Care
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
residue completely. Approved cleaning products cleaning products from your dealer. See Vehicle
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 561.
Care/Appearance Materials on page 561. Do not
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
water spotting. polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
High pressure car washes may cause water to finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
enter the vehicle. waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

557
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from Blades
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your If the windshield is not clear after using the
vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If when running, wax, sap or other material may
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are be on the blade or windshield.
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter. Clean the outside of the windshield with a
full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it
weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll with water.
over a period of years. You can help to keep
the paint finish looking new by keeping your Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to rinse the blade with water.
keep their luster. Washing with water is all Check the wiper blades and clean them as
that is usually needed. However, you may use necessary; replace blades that look worn.
chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if
necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright metal parts.

558
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
and Trim soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
chrome-plated wheels. brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth aluminum wheels.
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
towel. A wax may then be applied. wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
may be damaged if you do not wash your
vehicle after driving on roads that have been Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for buff off immediately after application.
conditions such as ice and dust. This damage Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
would not be covered by your vehicle’s automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
warranty. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
with soap and water after exposure. the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or or chrome-plated wheels through an
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would not tire cleaning brushes.
be covered by your warranty. Use only
GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
559
Tires Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
cleaner. the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing major repair expense.
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
dressing, always wipe off any overspray touch-up materials available from your dealer.
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts control can collect on the underbody. If these are
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
protection. underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have
Original manufacturer replacement parts will corrosion protection.
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty. At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.

560
Chemical Paint Spotting Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can Description Usage
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
This damage can take two forms: blotchy, Wax-Treated polishing cloth.
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular Tar and Road Oil Removes tar, road oil,
dark spots etched into the paint surface. Remover and asphalt.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or
Polish stainless steel.
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black
Cleaner marks from whitewalls.
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel Removes dirt and grime
Cleaner from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
Finish Enhancer fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches
and protects finish.

561
 Description Usage Vehicle Identification
Foaming Tire Shine Low Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
Gloss wiping necessary. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
Spot Lifter and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics, appears on a plate in the front corner of the
vinyl, leather and carpet.
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.

562
Service Parts Identification Label Electrical System
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. Add-On Electrical Equipment
The label has the following information:
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) vehicle unless you check with your dealer
• Model designation first. Some electrical equipment can damage
• Paint information your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
• Production options and special equipment electrical equipment can keep other
Do not remove this label from the vehicle. components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 106.

563
Windshield Wiper Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.
stop until the motor cools. If the overload is This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
caused by some electrical problem and not snow, electrical problems.
etc., be sure to get it fixed. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Power Windows and Other Power Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
Options the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
other power accessories. If the current load is too the same amperage. Just pick some feature
heavy, the circuit breaker opens and then of your vehicle that you can get along without, like
closes after a cool down period, protecting the the radio or cigarette lighter, and use its fuse if
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as
you can.

564
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses Usage
AUX PWR2 Rear Cargo Area Power Outlets
The instrument panel fuse block access door is
located on the driver’s side edge of the instrument SWC BKLT Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
panel. DDM Driver Door Module
CTSY Dome Lamps, Driver’s Side Turn
Signal
LT STOP TRN Driver’s Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
DIM Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger’s Side Turn Signal,
RT STOP TRN Stoplamp
BCM Body Control Module
UNLCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
LCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
STOP LAMPS
Stoplamp
REAR HVAC Rear Climate Controls
PDM Passenger Door Module, Universal
Home Remote System
AUX PWR Accessory Power Outlets

Fuses Usage
LT DR Driver’s Side Power Window Circuit
Breaker
REAR SEAT Rear Seats

565
 Fuses Usage Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
IS LPS Interior Lamps
The center instrument panel fuse block is
UNLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature) located underneath the instrument panel, to the
OBS DET Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, left of the steering column.
Power Liftgate
LCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature) Top View
REAR WPR Rear Wiper
COOLED Not Used
SEATS
DSM Driver Seat Module, Remote
Keyless Entry System

Harness
Connector Usage
LT DR Driver’s Door Harness Connection
BODY Harness Connector
BODY Harness Connector

Harness Usage
Connector
BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2
BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1
BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3

566
 Harness Usage
Underhood Fuse Block
Connector
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
BRAKE Brake Clutch Harness Connector
CLUTCH
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
SEO/UPFITTER Harness Connector

Circuit Breaker Usage

CB1 Passenger’s Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB2 Passenger’s Seat Circuit Breaker
CB3 Driver’s Seat Circuit Breaker
CB4 Not Used The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between
your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

567
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
1 Not Used 3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Electronic Stability Suspension 4 Engine Controls
2 Control, Automatic Level Control Engine Control Module, Throttle
Exhaust 5 Control

568
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
6 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp 18 Oxygen Sensors
7 Front Washer 19 Transmission Controls (Ignition)
8 Oxygen Sensors 20 Fuel Pump
9 Anti-lock Brakes System 2 21 Not Used
10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 22 Rear Washer
11 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp 23 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
12 Engine Control Module (Battery) (Left Side)
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils 24 Trailer Park Lamps
13 (Right Side) 25 Driver’s Side Park Lamps
14 Transmission Control Module 26 Passenger’s Side Park Lamps
(Battery) 27 Fog Lamps
15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps 28 Horn
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam Passenger’s Side High-Beam
16 29
Headlamp Headlamp
17 Air Conditioning Compressor

569
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
30 Daytime Running Lamps 44 Liftgate Release
31 Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp 45 OnStar®, Rear Seat Entertainment
32 Not Used Display
33 Sunroof, Emergency Roof Lamp 46 Instrument Panel Cluster
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent 47 Not Used
34
System 48 Not Used
35 Windshield Wiper Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),
49 Compass-Temperature Mirror
36 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
37 Electric Adjustable Pedals 50 Rear Defogger
38 Climate Controls (Battery) 51 Airbag System (Battery)
39 Airbag System (Ignition) 52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
40 Amplifier 53 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
41 Audio System
Automatic Level Control Compressor
42 Four-Wheel Drive 54 Relay, SEO Upfitter Usage
43 Miscellaneous (Ignition), Rear Vision 55 Climate Controls (Ignition)
Camera, Cruise Control
56 Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)

570
J-Case Fuses Usage Relays Usage
60 Cooling Fan 1 FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed
61 Automatic Level Control Compressor FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed
62 Heavy Duty Anti-lock Brake System ENG EXH VLV Not Used
63 Cooling Fan 2 FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control
64 Anti-lock Brake System 1 HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamp
65 Starter FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps
66 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor
67 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 STRTR Starter
68 Electric Running Boards PWR/TRN Powertrain
69 Heated Windshield Washer System FUEL PMP Fuel Pump
70 Four-Wheel Drive System PRK LAMP Parking Lamps
71 Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
Power) RUN/CRANK Switched Power
72 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
73 Climate Control Blower
74 Power Liftgate Module
75 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2

571
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 for more information.

Capacities
Application
English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Cooling System
4.8L V8 17.8 qt 16.9 L
5.3L V8 18.3 qt 17.3 L
6.0L V8 1500 Series 17.9 qt 16.9 L
6.0L V8 2500 Series 17.4 qt 16.5 L
Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 qt† 5.7 L†
Fuel Tank
Regular 26.0 gal 98.4 L
Extended 1500 Series 31.5 gal 119.2 L
Extended 2500 Series 39.0 gal 147.6 L
Transmission Fluid
4L70-E Super Duty Transmission and 4L60-E Electronic 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Transmission
4L80-E Transmission 7.7 qt 7.3 L

572
 Capacities
Application
English Metric
Transfer Case Fluid 2.0 qt 1.9 L
Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range.

Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.8L V8 C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel
with Active Fuel 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Management™ (Iron)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Aluminum Block)
5.3L V8 with Active Fuel
J Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Management™
6.0L V8 K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 with Active Fuel
Y Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Management™

573
✍ NOTES

574
 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 576 Owner Checks and Services ..................... 586
Introduction ............................................... 576 At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 586
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 576 At Least Once a Month ............................. 587
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 576 At Least Once a Year ............................... 587
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 577 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 590
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 579 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 592
Additional Required Services ..................... 582 Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 593
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 584 Maintenance Record .................................. 594

575
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
Introduction inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
and change as recommended.
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The your vehicle in good working condition, but also
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. helps the environment. All recommended
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
or your dealer for details. maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

576
Using the Maintenance Schedule This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
recommended limits. You will find these limits
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407.
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in • are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle legal driving limits.
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to • are driven off-road in the recommended
work, to do errands, or in many other ways. manner. See Off-Road Driving on page 372.
Because of all the different ways people use their • use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may Octane on page 447.
need more frequent checks and replacements. So
please read the following and note how you The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
drive. If you have any questions on how to keep page 579 should be performed when indicated.
your vehicle in good condition, see your GM See Additional Required Services on page 582 and
Goodwrench® dealer. Maintenance Footnotes on page 584 for further
information.

577
 If you want to purchase service information, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
{CAUTION: page 616.
Owner Checks and Services on page 586 tells you
Performing maintenance work on a
what should be checked, when to check it, and
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
some jobs, you can be seriously injured. good condition.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
proper tools and equipment for the job. If
Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 and Normal
you have any doubt, see your GM Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 592.
Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
technician do the work. See Doing Your are used. All parts should be replaced and all
Own Service Work on page 445. necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.

578
Scheduled Maintenance If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
comes on, it means that service is required for Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on
as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 page 462 for information on the Engine Oil Life
km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the System and resetting the system.
best conditions, the engine oil life system may
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
over a year. However, your engine oil and
are required. Required services are described
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
in the following for “Maintenance I” and
this time the system must be reset. Your GM
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended
Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
that your first service be Maintenance I, your
technicians who will perform this work using
second service be Maintenance II, and that you
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.

579
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on previous service performed was Maintenance I.
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
or Maintenance II was performed. comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 459. Reset oil life system.
• •
See Engine Oil Life System on page 462. An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
•
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 464. See footnote (l).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 521 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on • •
page 587.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

580
 Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
• •
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

581
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
• • • • • •
leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
• • •
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 464.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service). See • • •
footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
•
and filter (normal service).

582
 Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case
• • •
fluid. See footnote (g).
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service. See • • •
footnotes † and (k).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control •
Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
•
first). An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See •
footnote (m).

583
Maintenance Footnotes (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or parts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect
the California Air Resources Board has determined power steering lines and hoses for proper
that the failure to perform this maintenance item hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
will not nullify the emission warranty or limit Visually check constant velocity joints, rubber
recall liability prior to the completion of the boots, and axle seals for leaks.
vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance services be performed (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
be recorded. Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
transmission shift linkage, and parking brake system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
cable guides. Control arm ball joints on 2500 of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
series vehicles require lubrication but should not recommended at least once a year.
be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F
(−12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged. (d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
Control arm ball joints on 1500 series vehicles are cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
maintenance-free. or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc.

584
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
anchorages are working properly. Look for more of these conditions:
any other loose or damaged safety belt system − In heavy city traffic where the outside
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. higher.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings, − In hilly or mountainous terrain.
and have them repaired or replaced. The − When doing frequent trailer towing.
airbag system does not need regular maintenance. − Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch service.
assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer service can be complex; you should have
liftgate handle pivot points, rear door detent link, your dealer perform this service. See Engine
roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch Coolant on page 470 for what to use. Inspect
bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks, hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and folding seat hardware. More frequent and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
lubrication may be required when exposed to a system and pressure cap.
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
a problem. Have the system inspected and
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and needed.
proper installation.

585
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines At Each Fuel Fill
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and
condition. Check that the purge valve works It is important to perform these underhood checks
properly, if equipped. Replace as needed. at each fuel fill.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, Engine Oil Level Check
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive necessary. See Engine Oil on page 459 for
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if further details.
necessary.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Owner Checks and Services Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper
These owner checks and services should be level can cause damage to the engine not
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure covered by your warranty.
the safety, dependability, and emission control Engine Coolant Level Check
performance of your vehicle. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with these Check the engine coolant level and add
checks and services. DEX-COO® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 470 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper Check the windshield washer fluid level in
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
Lubricants on page 590. proper fluid if necessary.

586
At Least Once a Month At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check Starter Switch Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure
they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire {CAUTION:
Pressure on page 515. Check to make sure the
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat When you are doing this inspection, the
Tire on page 532. vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
Tire Wear Inspection
injured.
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire room around the vehicle.
Inspection and Rotation on page 521. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on
page 156.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if
it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.

587
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
Control System Check but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
{CAUTION: shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
When you are doing this inspection, the Ignition Transmission Lock Check
vehicle could move suddenly. If the While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
vehicle moves, you or others could be to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
injured. position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough the shift lever is in PARK (P).
room around the vehicle. It should be parked • The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.
on a level surface.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking required.
Brake on page 156.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

588
Parking Brake and Automatic • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
{CAUTION: Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
When you are doing this check, your
Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut
vehicle could begin to move. You or
Service
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear,
room in front of your vehicle in case it corrosion, cracks, loss of lubricant, or other
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the damage. Check the hold open ability of gas strut.
regular brake at once should the vehicle If necessary, replace with genuine GM parts.
begin to move. Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
brake, set the parking brake. other debris can collect.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

589
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants Windshield
Washer GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
part number, or specification can be obtained from System (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
your dealer. Canada 89021186).
Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Engine oil which meets GM (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Standard GM6094M and displays Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines Chassis Lubricant
Engine Oil starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench® Chassis (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
oil meets all the requirements for Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s Category LB or GC-LB.
engine, see Engine Oil on page 459. Front Axle
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable (1500 Series SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
water and use only DEX-COOL® Vehicles with (GM Part No. U.S. 1052271, in
Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on Four-Wheel Canada 10950849).
page 470. Drive)
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

590
 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(2500 Series Lubricant (GM Part Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Vehicles with No. U.S. 12378261, in Canada 10953474).
Four-Wheel Canada 10953455) meeting Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Drive) GM Specification 9986115. Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Points Canada 10953474).
Lubricant (GM Part Weatherstrip Lubricant
Rear Axle No. U.S. 12378261, in (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Canada 10953455) meeting Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
GM Specification 9986115. Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
Automatic AUTO-TRAK II Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Transfer Case in Canada 992887).
(Four-Wheel (GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in
Canada 10953626). Synthetic Grease with
Drive) Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
Front Axle Squeaks (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
Propshaft in Canada 10953437).
Spline or Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
One-Piece (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Propshaft Canada 10953511) or lubricant
Spline meeting requirements of
(Two-Wheel GM 9985830.
Drive with
Auto. Trans.)

591
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM
dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
ACDelco® Part
Part GM Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner /Filter
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A1518C
Standard Filter 15908916 A1519C*
Oil Filter 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm) 15930910 —
Rear – 11.8 inches (30.0 cm) 15173728 —
*A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.

592
Engine Drive Belt Routing

593
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on
page 576. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 586 can be added on the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

594
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

595
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

596
 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 598 Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 615
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 598 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ................................. 601 United States Government ..................... 615
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 602 Canadian Government ............................ 615
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 602 Reporting Safety Defects to General
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 603 Motors ................................................... 615
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 604 Service Publications Ordering Information .... 616
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 607
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ...................................... 609
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 610

597
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership/retailer management, it appears your
Information concern cannot be resolved by the
dealership/retailer without further help, in the U.S.,
Customer Satisfaction Procedure contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada,
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important contact General Motors of Canada Customer
to your dealer/retailer and to Chevrolet. Normally, Communication Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777
any concerns with the sales transaction or the (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
dealer’s/retailer’s sales or service departments.
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of
have the following information available to give
all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If
the Customer Assistance Representative:
your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member title, or the plate at the top left of the
of dealership/retailer management. Normally, instrument panel and visible through the
concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If windshield.
the matter has already been reviewed with
the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the
• Dealership/retailer name and location.
owner of the dealership/retailer or the general • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
manager. (kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a
dealer’s/retailer’s facility. That is why we suggest
you follow Step One first if you have a concern.

598
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
Motors and your dealer/retailer are committed to using the toll-free telephone number or write them
making sure you are completely satisfied with your at the following address:
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain BBB Auto Line Program
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the Better 4200 Wilson Boulevard
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program Suite 800
to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
program administered by the Council of Better This program is available in all 50 states and the
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
may be required to resort to this informal dispute limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
resolution program prior to filing a court action, this program.
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.

599
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event For further information concerning eligibility in the
that you do not feel your concerns have been Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
addressed after following the procedure outlined in (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Alternatively, you may call the General Motors
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed write to:
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving The Mediation/Arbitration Program
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program c/o Customer Communication Centre
provides for the review of the facts involved by General Motors of Canada Limited
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an Mail Code: CA1-163-005
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
process, from the time you file your complaint
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
to the final decision, should be completed in about
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

600
Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
(United States only) on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
be found in one place. you will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to: − My Showroom: Find and save information on
• Get e-mail service reminders. vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Access information about your specific − My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
vehicle, including tips and videos and address and phone number for each of
an electronic version of this owner manual. your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
and maintenance schedule.
your vehicle.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service − My Preferences: Manage your profile,
nationwide. subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
• Receive special promotions and privileges with greater ease.
only available to members. To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
updated information and to register your vehicle.

601
Customer Assistance for Text www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text (243-8872)
Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment Fax Number: 313-381-0022
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with From Puerto Rico:
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). 1-800-496-9992 (English)
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Offices From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the Fax Number: 313-381-0022
toll-free number for assistance. However, if a Canada — Customer Assistance
customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the
letter should be addressed to: General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
United States — Customer Assistance 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center www.gmcanada.com
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-263-3777 (English)
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

602
Overseas — Customer Assistance GM Mobility Reimbursement
Please contact the local General Motors Program
Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center This program, available to qualified applicants, can
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
Col. Lomas de Bezares aftermarket adaptive equipment required for
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
01-800-508-0000 wheelchair/scooter lift.
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

603
Roadside Assistance Program • Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
In the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA (approximately $5 in Canada). Service
(1-800-243-8872). to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800. reasons, propane and other alternative
fuels will not be provided through this service.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year. • Lock-out Service: To ensure security,
the driver must present personal identification
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are before lock-out service is provided. In
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside Canada, the vehicle registration is also
Assistance program. required. Lock-out service will be covered at
Who is Covered? no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. A remote unlock may
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle be available if you have an active OnStar®
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, subscription.
a person driving this vehicle without the consent of
the owner is not eligible for coverage. • Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest
The following services are provided in the U.S. dealership/retailer for warranty service or in
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and, the event of a vehicle-disabling accident.
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage Winch-out assistance when the vehicle
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
a maximum coverage of $100.

604
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
in good condition, when equipped and (Canada only): In the event of a warranty
properly inflated, is covered at no charge. The related vehicle disablement, while en route and
customer is responsible for the repair or over 250 kilometres from original point of
replacement of the tire if not covered by a departure, you may qualify for trip interruption
warrantable failure. expense assistance. This assistance covers
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
require a battery jump start will be covered at of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
no charge. $50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon (maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
request, Roadside Assistance will send you you with some of the unplanned expense you
detailed, computer personalized maps, may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
highlighting your choice of either the most repaired.
direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
with helpful travel information pertaining to a copy of the repair order are required.
your trip. Once authorization has been given, your
We will make every attempt to send your advisor will help you make any necessary
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible, arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
but it is best to allow three weeks before your interruption expense assistance.
planned departure date. Trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.

605
 • Alternative Service (Canada only): There • Model, year, color, and license plate number.
may be times, when Roadside Assistance • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
cannot provide timely assistance, your advisor Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
may authorize you to secure local emergency
road service, and you will be reimbursed up to • Description of the problem.
$100 upon submission of the original receipt to While we hope you never have the occasion to
Roadside Assistance. use our service, it is added security while traveling
In many instances, mechanical failures are for you and your family. Remember, we are
covered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper only a phone call away. U.S. customers call
warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new (1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are call 1-800-268-6800.
the responsibility of the driver. Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
please provide the following to the Roadside to an owner or driver when, in their sole
Assistance Representative: discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number. Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
• Telephone number of your location. Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
• Location of the vehicle. Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.

606
Towing and Road Service Exclusions Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
at participating dealers/retailers. A separate
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
Information” furnished with each new vehicle
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing Scheduling Service Appointments
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
contact your dealer/retailer and request an
Courtesy Transportation appointment. By scheduling a service appointment
To enhance your ownership experience, we and and advising your service consultant of your
our participating dealers/retailers are proud to offer transportation needs, your dealer/retailer can help
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support minimize your inconvenience.
program for new vehicles. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper service department immediately, keep driving it
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
Warranty, interim transportation may be available please call your dealership/retailer, let them know
under the Courtesy Transportation program. this, and ask for instructions.
Several courtesy transportation options are If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do
when warranty repairs are required. so as early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.

607
Transportation Options In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
Warranty service can generally be completed reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by costs and be supported by original receipts.
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your Courtesy Rental Vehicle
dealer/retailer can offer you one of the following: Your dealer/retailer may arrange to provide you
Shuttle Service with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
Courtesy Transportation and participating reimbursement will be limited and must be
dealers/retailers can provide you with shuttle supported by original receipts. This requires that
service to get you to your destination with minimal you sign and complete a rental agreement
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
one-way or round trip shuttle service within provider requirements. Requirements vary and
reasonable time and distance parameters for the may include minimum age requirements, insurance
dealer’s/retailer’s area. coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
Public Transportation or Fuel for fuel usage charges and may also be
Reimbursement responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, completion of the repair.
and public transportation is used as ‘shuttle
service,’ the reimbursement is limited to the Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
associated shuttle allowance and must be as a courtesy rental.
supported by original receipts.

608
Additional Program Information control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
All program options, such as shuttle service, may
operations to facilitate repair of detected
not be available at every dealer/retailer. Please
malfunctions; other information is stored
contact your dealer/retailer for specific information
only in a crash event by computer systems,
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
such as those commonly called Event Data
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
Recorders (EDR).
dealer/retailer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally In a crash event, computer systems, such as
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy the airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Transportation at any time and to resolve all (SDM) in your vehicle may record information
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms about the condition of the vehicle and how
and conditions described herein at its sole it was operated, such as data related to engine
discretion. speed, brake application, throttle position,
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, airbag
Vehicle Data Collection and Event readiness, airbag performance, and the
severity of a collision. If your vehicle is
Data Recorders equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, performance, including yaw rate, steering
has a number of sophisticated computer wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is also
systems that monitor and control several recorded. This information has been used
aspects of the vehicle’s performance. Your to improve vehicle crash performance and may
vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to be used to improve crash performance of
monitor emission control components to future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions data recorders on many airplanes, these
for airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to on-board systems do not record sounds, such
provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver as conversation of vehicle occupants.

609
To read this information, special equipment is Others, such as law enforcement, may have
needed and access to the vehicle or the access to the special equipment that can read
device that stores the data is required. GM will the information if they have access to the
not access information about a crash event vehicle or the device that stores the data.
or share it with others other than: If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if OnStar® subscription service agreement or
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of manual for information on its operations and
the lessee, data collection.
• in response to an official request of police
or similar government office, Collision Damage Repair
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
through the discovery process, or damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
• as required by law. technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
GM may:
value, and safety performance can be
• use the data for GM research needs, compromised in subsequent collisions.
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be
maintained and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.

610
Collision Parts Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
with the same materials and construction methods result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
as the parts with which your vehicle was durability/corrosion problems, and may not
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are perform properly in subsequent collisions.
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
designed appearance, durability, and safety are New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help failure related to such parts are not covered by that
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed Repair Facility
from vehicles that were total losses in prior GM also recommends that you choose a collision
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled repair facility that meets your needs before you
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer
recycled original equipment GM part, may may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s technicians and state of the art equipment, or
originally designed appearance and safety be able to recommend a collision repair center that
performance, however, the history of these parts has GM-trained technicians and comparable
is not known. Such parts are not covered by equipment.
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.

611
Insuring Your Vehicle If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with Here is what to do if you are involved in an
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. accident.
There are significant differences in the quality • Try to relax and then check to make sure you
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced that no one else in your vehicle, or the
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting other vehicle, is injured.
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance • If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
companies will not specify aftermarket collision Do not leave the scene of an accident until
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend all matters have been taken care of. Move
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired your vehicle only if its position puts you
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
insurance coverage is not available from your police officer.
current insurance carrier, consider switching • Give only the necessary and requested
to another insurance carrier. information to police and other parties involved
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
require you to have insurance that assures condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine against post-accident legal action.
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease • If you need roadside assistance, call GM
carefully, as you may be charged at the end of Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
your lease for poor quality repairs. Assistance Program on page 604 for more
information.

612
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where • If possible, call your insurance company from
the towing service will be taking it. Get a the scene of the accident. They will walk you
card from the tow truck operator or write down through the information they will need. If
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the phone number. the police department headquarters the
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle next day and you can get a copy of the report
before it is towed away. Make sure this for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
includes your insurance information and with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
registration if you keep these items in your be necessary. This is especially true if there
vehicle. are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Gather the important information you will need • Choose a reputable collision repair facility
from the other driver. Things like name, for your vehicle. Whether you select a
address, phone number, driver’s license GM dealer/retailer or a private collision repair
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make, facility to fix the damage, make sure you
model and model year, Vehicle Identification are comfortable with them. Remember, you
Number (VIN), insurance company and will have to feel comfortable with their work for
policy number, and a general description of a long time.
the damage to the other vehicle. • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work
will be performed on your vehicle. If you have
a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.

613
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
Process live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
In the event that your vehicle requires damage the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active with your repair professional, and insist on
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or leased you may be obligated to have the
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
any required replacement collision parts be original your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts If another party’s insurance company is paying
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle repair valuation based on that insurance
warranty. company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.

614
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
United States Government vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
could cause a crash or could cause injury or You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), Transport Canada
in addition to notifying General Motors. Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall Reporting Safety Defects to General
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between Motors
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: you will notify General Motors. Please call the
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
write to: 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA Chevrolet Motor Division
400 Seventh Street, SW. Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
Washington, D.C. 20590 P.O. Box 33170
You can also obtain other information about motor Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
615
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 Service Bulletins
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
Service Bulletins give technical service information
General Motors of Canada Limited needed to knowledgeably service General
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
1908 Colonel Sam Drive instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 of your vehicle.
Service Publications Ordering In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General
Information Motors dealer/retailer or by calling
1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). This
Service Manuals reference number is needed to order the service
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair bulletin from Helm, Inc.
information on engines, transmission, axle RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.

616
Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
Eastern Time
information about the vehicle. The owner For Credit Card Orders Only
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
all models. the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, Or you can write to:
and Warranty Booklet. Helm, Incorporated
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US + P.O. Box 07130
Processing Fee Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US + for delivery.
Processing Fee
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
Current and Past Model Order Forms quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.

617
✍ NOTES

618
 A Airbag Systems (cont.)
Passenger Sensing System ...................... 101
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 444 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 106
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 98
Equipment ................................................ 412 Antenna, Rear Side Window ........................ 354
Adding Equipment to Your Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................... 107 System .................................................... 354
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 448 Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 361
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 563 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 251
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 143 Appearance Care
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 464 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 559
Air Conditioning .................................. 227, 231 Care of Safety Belts ................................ 556
Airbag Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 561
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 246 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 557
Readiness Light ....................................... 245 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 553
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 554
Module (SDM) .......................................... 609 Finish Care .............................................. 557
Airbag System ............................................... 90 Finish Damage ......................................... 560
What Will You See After an Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 99 Plastic Surfaces .................................... 556
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 96 Leather .................................................... 555
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 93 Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 560
Airbag Systems Tires ........................................................ 560
Adding Equipment to Your Underbody Maintenance ........................... 560
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 107 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 561
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 99 Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 557

619
Appearance Care (cont.)
Weatherstrips ........................................... 556
B
Windshield, Backglass, and Battery ........................................................ 490
Wiper Blades ........................................ 558 Electric Power Management ..................... 220
Ashtray ....................................................... 227 Run-Down Protection ............................... 221
Audio System .............................................. 290 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 396
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 351 Bench Seat, Split (60/40) .............................. 20
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 353 Brake
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 353 Emergencies ............................................ 363
Navigation/Radio System, Parking .................................................... 156
see Navigation Manual ......................... 337 Brakes ........................................................ 486
Radio with CD ......................................... 294 System Warning Light .............................. 249
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 348 Braking ....................................................... 360
Setting the Time ..................... 291, 292, 293 Braking in Emergencies ............................... 363
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 350 Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 139
Understanding Radio Reception ............... 352 Bucket Seats, Rear ....................................... 26
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 354 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 502
Audio System(s) Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 502
Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 305 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 499
Rear Side Window Antenna ..................... 354 License Plate Lamps ................................ 504
Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 217 Replacement Bulbs .................................. 504
Automatic Transmission Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Fluid ........................................................ 466 Back-up Lamps ..................................... 502
Operation ................................................. 145 Buying New Tires ........................................ 524
Autoride® ..................................................... 422
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch .......... 218

620
 C Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 68
Calibration .......................................... 162, 166 Infants and Young Children ........................ 64
California Fuel ............................................. 447 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ....... 74
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 445 Older Children ........................................... 61
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 572 Rear Seat Position ................................. 82
Carbon Monoxide ..... 125, 127, 160, 400, 422 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Care of Center Front Seat Position ..................... 85
Safety Belts ............................................. 556 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 353 Right Front Seat Position ........................ 85
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 353 Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 72
Cargo Cover ............................................... 192 Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 227
Cargo Management System ........................ 194 Cleaning
CD, MP3 ............................................ 321, 327 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 559
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 190 Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 557
Center Front Passenger Position, Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 554
Safety Belts ............................................... 53 Finish Care .............................................. 557
Center Seat .................................................. 19 Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 553
Chains, Tire ................................................. 530 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Charging System Light ................................ 248 Plastic Surfaces .................................... 556
Check Leather .................................................... 555
Engine Light ............................................ 253 Tires ........................................................ 560
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 456 Underbody Maintenance ........................... 560
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 561 Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 557

621
Cleaning (cont.) Customer Assistance Information
Weatherstrips ........................................... 556 Courtesy Transportation ........................... 607
Windshield, Backglass, and Customer Assistance for Text
Wiper Blades ........................................ 558 Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 602
Climate Control System ............................... 227 Customer Assistance Offices .................... 602
Dual Automatic ......................................... 231 Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 598
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 238 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 603
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Reporting Safety Defects to
System ................................................. 239 General Motors ..................................... 615
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Reporting Safety Defects to the
System, Electronic ................................ 240 Canadian Government .......................... 615
Clock ......................................... 291, 292, 293 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 610 United States Government .................... 615
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 56 Roadside Assistance Program .................. 604
Compass ............................................ 162, 166 Service Publications Ordering
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 135 Information ........................................... 616
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 360
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 252 D
Heater, Engine ......................................... 143 Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 216
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 473 Defensive Driving ........................................ 356
Cooling System ........................................... 477 Delayed Locking .......................................... 123
Cruise Control ............................................. 211 Disc, MP3 .......................................... 321, 327
Cruise Control Light .................................... 258 Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 445
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 190

622
Dome Lamp Override .................................. 219 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 231
Dome Lamps ............................................... 219 DVD
Door Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 337
Delayed Locking ...................................... 123
Locks ....................................................... 122
Power Door Locks ................................... 123 E
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 123 Electrical System
Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 124 Add-On Equipment ................................... 563
Driver Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........ 566
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 43 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 564
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 260 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 565
DIC Operation and Displays ............ 261, 267 Power Windows and Other Power
DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 280 Options ................................................. 564
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 270 Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 567
Driving Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 564
At Night ................................................... 389 Engine
City .......................................................... 393 Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 464
Defensive ................................................. 356 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 253
Drunken ................................................... 357 Coolant .................................................... 470
Freeway ................................................... 394 Coolant Heater ......................................... 143
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 398 Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 252
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 390 Drive Belt Routing .................................... 593
Off-Road .................................................. 372 Engine Compartment Overview ................ 458
Recovery Hooks ....................................... 406 Exhaust ................................................... 160
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 405 Fan Noise ................................................ 483
Winter ...................................................... 400 Oil ........................................................... 459

623
Engine (cont.) Fog Lamp
Oil Life System ........................................ 462 Fog .......................................................... 218
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 476 Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 258
Overheating ............................................. 473 Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 150, 497
Starting .................................................... 141 Front Axle ................................................... 498
Entry Lighting .............................................. 220 Fuel ............................................................ 446
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 609 Additives .................................................. 448
Exit Lighting ................................................ 220 California Fuel .......................................... 447
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 60 E85 (85% Ethanol) ................................... 449
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 215 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 455
Filling Your Tank ...................................... 451
Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 450
F Gage ....................................................... 259
Filter Gasoline Octane ...................................... 447
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 464 Gasoline Specifications ............................ 447
Finish Damage ............................................ 560 Low Warning Light ................................... 260
Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 204 Fuses
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 207 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........ 566
Flat Tire ...................................................... 531 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 564
Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 532 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 565
Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 547 Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 567
Fluid Windshield Wiper ..................................... 564
Automatic Transmission ............................ 466
Power Steering ........................................ 484
Windshield Washer .................................. 485

624
 G Headlamps (cont.)
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 207
Gage On Reminder ........................................... 216
Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 252 Heated Seats ................................................ 12
Fuel ......................................................... 259 Heater ......................................................... 227
Oil Pressure ............................................. 256 Heater ......................................................... 231
Speedometer ........................................... 244 Highbeam On Light ..................................... 259
Tachometer .............................................. 244 Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 397
Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 249 Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 398
Garage Door Opener ................................... 178 Hood
Gasoline Checking Things Under ............................ 456
Octane ..................................................... 447 Release ................................................... 457
Specifications ........................................... 447 Horn ............................................................ 204
Glove Box ................................................... 190 How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 603 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 43

H I
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 204 Ignition Positions ......................................... 140
Head Restraints ............................................ 18 Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 64
Headlamp Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 515
Aiming ..................................................... 499 Instrument Panel
Headlamps Overview .................................................. 202
Bulb Replacement .................................... 502 Instrument Panel (I/P)
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 216 Brightness ................................................ 219
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 207 Cluster ..................................................... 243
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 502

625
 J Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 245
Jump Starting .............................................. 491 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 251
Brake System Warning ............................. 249
Charging System ..................................... 248
K Cruise Control .......................................... 258
Keyless Entry System ................................. 114 Fog Lamp ................................................ 258
Keys ........................................................... 113 Highbeam On .......................................... 259
Low Fuel Warning .................................... 260
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 253
L Oil Pressure ............................................. 257
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 508 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 246
Lamps Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 245
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .................. 218 Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 244
Dome ....................................................... 219 Security ................................................... 258
Dome Lamp Override ............................... 219 StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 252
Exterior .................................................... 215 Tire Pressure ........................................... 253
Reading ................................................... 220 Tow/Haul Mode ........................................ 259
LATCH System Lighting
Child Restraints ......................................... 74 Entry ........................................................ 220
Level Control ............................................... 421 Exit .......................................................... 220
License Plate Lamps ................................... 504 Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 407
Liftgate, Power ............................................ 127 Locking Rear Axle ....................................... 363
Liftgate/Liftglass ........................................... 125 Lockout Protection ....................................... 124
Liftglass/Liftgate ........................................... 125

626
Locks Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Delayed Locking ...................................... 123 Owner Checks and Services .................... 586
Door ........................................................ 122 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 590
Lockout Protection ................................... 124 Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 579
Power Door ............................................. 123 Using ....................................................... 577
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 123 Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 576
Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 124 Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 253
Loss of Control ........................................... 371 Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 260 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................ 13
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 191 Message
Lumbar DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 270
Power Controls .......................................... 11 Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass and Temperature Display ........ 166
M Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Maintenance Schedule Compass and Temperature Display ........ 162
Additional Required Services .................... 582 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ........... 172
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 586 Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 173
At Least Once a Month ............................ 587 Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ............. 172
At Least Once a Year .............................. 587 Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 173
Introduction .............................................. 576 Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 168
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 584 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .............. 171
Maintenance Record ................................ 594 Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 170
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 576 Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................... 169
Normal Maintenance MP3 ................................................... 321, 327
Replacement Parts ............................... 592 MyGMLink.com ............................................ 601

627
 N Outlets
Accessory Power ..................................... 225
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Outside
Manual ..................................................... 337 Automatic Dimming Mirror ........................ 172
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 139 Convex Mirror .......................................... 173
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 592 Curb View Assist Mirrors .......................... 172
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 173
Manual Mirrors ......................................... 168
O Power Foldaway Mirrors ........................... 171
Odometer .................................................... 244 Power Mirrors .......................................... 170
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 244 Trailer-Tow Mirrors ................................... 169
Off-Road Driving .......................................... 372 Overheated Engine Protection
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 369 Operating Mode ....................................... 476
Oil Owner Checks and Services ....................... 586
Engine ..................................................... 459 Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
Pressure Gage ......................................... 256
Pressure Light .......................................... 257
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 462 P
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 61 Paint, Damage ............................................ 560
Online Owner Center ................................... 601 Park Aid ...................................................... 222
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 173 Park (P)
Operation, Universal Home Shifting Into ............................................. 157
Remote System .............................. 178, 182 Shifting Out of ......................................... 159
Other Warning Devices ................................ 204
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 238

628
Parking
Assist ....................................................... 222
R
Brake ....................................................... 156 Radios ........................................................ 290
Over Things That Burn ............................ 159 Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 353
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 246 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 353
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 101 Navigation/Radio System,
Passing ....................................................... 369 see Navigation Manual ......................... 337
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 137 Radio with CD ......................................... 294
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 137 Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 305
Power Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 348
Door Locks .............................................. 123 Setting the Time ..................... 291, 292, 293
Electrical System ..................................... 564 Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 350
Liftgate ..................................................... 127 Understanding Reception ......................... 352
Lumbar Controls ........................................ 11 Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................. 208
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 141 Reading Lamps ........................................... 220
Running Boards ....................................... 131 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
Seat .......................................................... 10 System .................................................... 239
Steering Fluid .......................................... 484 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
Windows .................................................. 133 System and Electronic Climate Controls ..... 240
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 60 Rear Axle .................................................... 496
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 123 Locking .................................................... 363
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 124
Rear Heated Seats ....................................... 19
Q Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 56
Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 192
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 42

629
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 348 Restraint System Check
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 337 Checking the Restraint Systems ............... 108
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 54 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Rear Side Window Antenna ......................... 354 After a Crash ........................................ 109
Rear Storage Area ...................................... 192 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 141
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 210 Right Front Passenger Position,
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with Safety Belts ............................................... 52
Compass and Temperature Display .......... 166 Roadside
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with Assistance Program ................................. 604
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 405
Display ..................................................... 162 Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 593
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 15 Running Boards, Power ............................... 131
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 590 Running the Engine While Parked ............... 161
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 406
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 418
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 114 S
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Safety Belt
Operation ................................................. 115 Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 245
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Pretensioners ............................................. 60
Spare Tire ................................................ 537 Reminder Light ........................................ 244
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 533 Safety Belts
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 504 Care of .................................................... 556
Reporting Safety Defects Center Front Passenger Position ................ 53
Canadian Government ............................. 615 Driver Position ........................................... 43
General Motors ........................................ 615 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 43
United States Government ....................... 615

630
Safety Belts (cont.) Securing a Child Restraint
Questions and Answers About Center Front Seat Position ......................... 85
Safety Belts ............................................ 42 Rear Seat Position ..................................... 82
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 56 Right Front Seat Position ........................... 85
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 54 Security Light .............................................. 258
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 52 Service ........................................................ 444
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 60 Accessories and Modifications .................. 444
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 52 Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 38 Your Vehicle ......................................... 446
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 51 California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 445
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4 Doing Your Own Work ............................. 445
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 579 Engine Soon Light ................................... 253
Seats Publications Ordering Information ............. 616
60/40 Split Bench Seat .............................. 20 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 106
Bucket Seats, Rear .................................... 26 Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 560
Center Seat ............................................... 19 Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 157
Head Restraints ......................................... 18 Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 159
Heated Seats ............................................. 12 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 51
Heated Seats - Rear .................................. 19 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 206
Manual ........................................................ 9 Snow Plow .................................................. 412
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ...................... 13 Spare Tire ................................................... 552
Power Lumbar ........................................... 11 Installing .................................................. 537
Power Seats .............................................. 10 Removing ................................................ 533
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 15 Storing ..................................................... 547
Third Row Seat ......................................... 33 Specifications, Capacities ............................ 572
Secondary Latch System ............................. 543 Speedometer ............................................... 244

631
Split Bench Seat (60/40) ............................... 20 Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 350
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 363 Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 135
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 252 Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 135
Starting Your Engine ................................... 141 PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 137
Steering ...................................................... 367 PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 137
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 351 Third Row Seat ............................................. 33
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 204 Tilt Wheel .................................................... 204
Storage Areas Time, Setting ............................. 291, 292, 293
Cargo Management System ..................... 194 Tire
Center Console Storage Area ................... 190 Pressure Light .......................................... 253
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 190 Tires ........................................................... 507
Glove Box ................................................ 190 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Luggage Carrier ....................................... 191 Cleaning ............................................... 559
Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 192 Buying New Tires ..................................... 524
Rear Storage Area ................................... 192 Chains ..................................................... 530
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 404 Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 532
Sun Visors .................................................. 134 Cleaning .................................................. 560
Sunroof ....................................................... 197 Different Size ........................................... 526
System Identification, Universal Home If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 531
Remote System ....................................... 177 Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 515
Inspection and Rotation ............................ 521
Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 537
T Pressure Monitor System ......................... 516
Tachometer ................................................. 244 Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 537
Taillamps Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 533
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Secondary Latch System ......................... 543
Back-up Lamps ..................................... 502

632
Tires (cont.)
Spare Tire ................................................ 552
U
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ......... 547 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 222
Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 508 Understanding Radio Reception ................... 352
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 512 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 527
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 527 Universal Home Remote System ................. 178
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 528 Operation ........................................ 178, 182
Wheel Replacement ................................. 528 System Identification ................................ 177
When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 523
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 149
Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 259 V
Towing Vehicle
Recreational Vehicle ................................. 418 Control ..................................................... 360
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 422 Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Your Vehicle ............................................. 417 Loading .................................................... 407
Traction Symbols ...................................................... 5
StabiliTrak® System ................................. 363 Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 280
Trailer Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recommendations .................................... 440 Recorders ................................................ 609
Transmission Vehicle Identification
Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 466 Number (VIN) .......................................... 562
Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 145 Service Parts Identification Label .............. 563
Trip Odometer ............................................. 244 Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 238
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 206 Visors .......................................................... 134
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 205 Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 249

633
 W Windshield (cont.)
Washer .................................................... 209
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 242 Washer Fluid ........................................... 485
Warnings Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 505
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 270 Wiper Fuses ............................................ 564
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 204 Wipers ..................................................... 207
Other Warning Devices ............................ 204 Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 210
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4 Winter Driving ............................................. 400
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 528
Different Size ........................................... 526
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 335
Replacement ............................................ 528 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 354
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 72
Windows ..................................................... 132
Power ...................................................... 133
Windshield
Y
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 576
Cleaning ............................................... 558
Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................. 208

634